Samsung | DVD-R130 | Samsung DVD-R130 User Manual

01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_Cover 3/28/06 11:02 AM Page 1
Instruction Manual
DVD-R130
www.samsung.com/mea
English
AK68-01004L-00
Getting Started
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 2
Warning
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE THE COVER(OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The mains lead on this equipment is supplied with a
moulded plug incorporating a fuse. The value of the
fuse is indicated on the pin face of the plug. If it requires
replacing, a fuse approved to BS1362 of the same
rating must be used.
Never use the plug with the fuse cover omitted if the cover
is detachable. If a replacement fuse cover is
required, it must be of the same colour as the pin face of
the plug. Replacement covers are available from your
dealer.
If the fitted plug is not suitable for the power points in your
house or the cable is not long enough to reach a
power point, you should obtain a suitable safety approved
extension lead or consult your dealer for assistance.
This symbol indicates “dangerous
voltage” inside the product that presents
a risk of electric shock or personal injury.
However, if there is no alternative to cutting off the plug,
remove the fuse and then safely dispose of the
plug. Do not connect the plug to a mains jack, as there is a
risk of shock hazard from the bared flexible cord.
This symbol indicates important
instructions accompanying the product.
To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must
be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains
plug shall be readily operable.
Do not install this equipment in a confined space
such as a bookcase or similar unit.
WARNING : To prevent damage which may result in
fire or electric shock hazard, do not
expose this appliance to rain or
moisture.
CAUTION : DVD RECORDER USES AN INVISIBLE
LASER BEAM WHICH CAN CAUSE
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE
IF DIRECTED.
BE SURE TO OPERATE RECORDER
CORRECTLY AS INSTRUCTED.
CAUTION
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR
YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
Caution: To prevent electric shock, match wide blade
of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
2- English
The product unit accompanying this user manual is
licensed under certain intellectual property rights of certain
third parties. This license is limited to private noncommercial use by end-user consumers for licensed
contents.
No rights are granted for commercial use.
The license does not cover any product unit other than this
product unit and the license does not extend to any
unlicensed product unit or process conforming to ISO/IEC
11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3 used or sold in combination
with this product unit. The license only covers the use of
this product unit to encode and/or decode audio files
conforming to the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3.
No rights are granted under this license for product features
or functions that do not conform to the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or
ISO/IEC 13818-3.
WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE
EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH
THE LETTER BY THE EARTH SYMBOL, OR
COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN AND YELLOW.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 3
Important Safety Instructions
Read these operating instructions carefully before using
the DVD Recorder. Follow all the safety instructions
listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy
for future
reference.
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings, Install in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding- type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A groundingtype plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. if the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid
injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
Handling Cautions
●
●
●
●
●
Before connecting other components to this DVD
Recorder, be sure to turn them all off.
Do not move the DVD Recorder while a disc is being
played, or the disc may be scratched or broken, the
DVD Recorder’s internal parts may be damaged.
Do not put a flower vase filled with water or any small
metal objects on the DVD Recorder.
Be careful not to put your hand into the disc tray.
Do not place anything other than the disc in the disc
tray.
●
●
●
●
Exterior interference such as lightning and static
electricity can affect normal operation of this DVD
Recorder. If this occurs, turn the DVD Recorder off
and on again with the STANDBY/ON button, or
disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord to
the AC power outlet.
The DVD Recorder will operate normally.
Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the DVD
Recorder after use.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet
when you don’t intend to use the DVD Recorder for
long periods of time.
Clean the disc by wiping in a straight line from the
inside to the outside of the disc.
Maintenance of Cabinet
For safety reasons, be sure to disconnect the AC power
cord from the AC outlet.
● Do not use benzene, thinner, or other solvents for
cleaning.
● Wipe the cabinet with a soft cloth.
Disc Handling
●
Use discs with regular
shapes. If an irregular disc
(a disc with a special shape) is used, this DVD
recorder may be damaged.
Holding discs
●
Avoid touching the surface of a
disc where recording is performed.
DVD-RW and DVD-R
●
Clean with an optional DVDRAM/PD disc cleaner (LFK200DCA1 where available).
Do not use cleaners or cloths
for CDs to clean DVD-RW/
DVD-R discs.
DVD-Video, Audio CD
●
Wipe off dirt or contamination on the disc with a soft
cloth.
Cautions on handling discs
●
●
●
●
●
●
Do not write on the printed side with a ball-point pen
or pencil.
Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic.
Also, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzene
or thinner.
Do not apply labels or stickers to discs. (Do not use
discs fixed with exposed tape adhesive or leftover
peeled-off stickers.)
Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
Do not use discs printed with label printers available
on the market.
Do not load warped or cracked discs.
English -3
Getting Started
Precaution
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/10/06 7:08 PM Page 4
Getting Started
Disc Storage
Be careful not to harm the disc because the data on
these discs is highly vulnerable to the environment.
● Do not keep under direct sunlight.
● Keep in a cool ventilated area.
● Store vertically.
● Keep in a clean protection jacket.
● If you move your DVD recorder suddenly from a cold
place to a warm place, condensation may generate
on the operating parts and lens and cause abnormal
disc playback. If this occurs, do not connect the plug
to the power outlet and wait for two hours. Then
insert the disc and try to play back again.
Disc Specifications
Using CD-R/-RW
●
●
●
Using MPEG4 disc
●
●
DVD-Video
●
●
●
A digital versatile disc (DVD) can contain up to
135-minutes of images, 8 audio languages and 32
subtitle languages. It is equipped with MPEG-2
picture compression and Dolby digital surrounding,
allowing you to enjoy vivid and clear theatre quality
images in the comfort of your own home.
When switching from the first layer to the second
layer of a dual-layered DVD Video disc, there may be
momentary distortion in the image and sound.
This is not a malfunction of the DVD Recorder.
Once a DVD-R/-RW recorded in Video Mode is
finalised, it becomes DVD-Video.
Audio CD
●
●
An audio disc on which 44.1kHz PCM Audio is
recorded
Plays CD-DA format audio CD-R and CD-RW discs.
The DVD Recorder may not be able to play some
CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the
recording.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CD-R/-RW
●
●
●
●
●
Only CD-R discs with MP3 files recorded with
ISO9660 or JOLIET format can be played back
Only MP3 files with the ".mp3", ".MP3" extension can
be used.
For MP3 files recorded with a VBR(Variable Bit
Rates), from 32 Kbps to 320 Kbps, the sound may
cut in out.
Playable bitrate range is from 56Kbps to 320Kbps.
This DVD Recorder can handle a maximum of 500
files and 100 folders.
JPEG CD-R/RW
●
●
●
●
Only JPEG files with the ".jpg", ".JPG" extension can
be used.
This DVD Recorder can handle a maximum of 500
files and 100 folders.
Maximum size of progressive JPEG is 3M pixels.
MOTION JPEG is not supported.
4- English
Disc : CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW
MPEG4 File with following extensions can be played.
: .avi, .divx, .AVI, .DIVX
MPEG4 Codec format : DivX 3.11 DivX 4.x DivX 5.x
DivX-Pro Xvid
Motion Compensation : QPEL, GMC
four CC : MPG4, mpg4, DIV3, divX3, DIVX, divX,
DX50, MP43, mp43, XVID, xvid
Available Audio Format : “MP3”, “MPEG1 Audio
Layer2”, “LPCM”, “AC3”, “DTS”, “MS ADPCM”
Supported subtitle file formats: .smi, .srt, .sub, .psb, .txt, .ass
DVD-R Disc Playback and Recording
●
MP3 CD-R/-RW
Use a 700MB(80 minutes) CD-R/-RW disc.
If possible, do not use a 800MB(90 minutes) or above
disc, as the disc may not play back.
If the CD-R/-RW disc was not recorded as a closed
session, you may experience a delay in the early
playback time, all recorded files may not play.
Some CD-R/-RW discs may not be playable with this
DVD Recorder, depending on the device which was
used to burn them. For contents recorded on CD-R/RW media from CDs for your personal use, playability
may vary depending on contents and discs.
●
●
Once a DVD-R recorded in Video Mode is finalised, it
becomes DVD-Video.
You can record onto the available space on the disc
and perform editing functions such as giving titles to
discs and programmes and erasing programmes
before finalising.
When programming is erased from a DVD-R, that
space does not become available. Once an area on
a DVD-R is recorded on, that area is no longer
available for recording, whether the recording is
erased or not.
It takes about 30 seconds for the DVD Recorder to
complete recording management information after
recording finishes.
This DVD Recorder optimizes the DVD-R for each
recording. Optimizing is carried out when you start
recording after inserting the disc or turning on the
DVD Recorder. Recording onto the disc may become
impossible if optimizing is carried out too many times.
Playback may be impossible in some cases due to
the condition of recording.
This DVD Recorder can play back DVD-R discs
recorded and finalised with a Samsung DVD video
recorder. It may not be able to play some DVD-R
discs depending on the disc and the condition of the
recording.
DVD-RW Disc Playback and Recording
●
●
●
●
Recording and playback can be performed on DVDRW discs in both the Video and VR Modes.
Once a DVD-RW recorded in both the Video and VR
Modes is finalised, you cannot perform addtional
recording.
Once a DVD-RW recorded in Video Mode is finalised,
it becomes DVD-Video.
In both modes, playback can be performed before
and after finalisation, but additional recording,
deleting and editing can not be performed after
finalisation.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 5
●
●
●
DVD-RW (VR mode)
- This is a format that is used for recording data on a
DVD-RW disc.
You can record multiple titles, edit, delete, partial
delete, create a playlist, etc.
- A disc that is recorded in this mode may not be
played by existing DVD Recorder.
DVD-RW (Video mode)
- This is a format that is used for recording data on a
DVD-RW or DVD-R disc. The disc can be played
by existing DVD Recorder once it has been
finalised.
- If a disc that has been recorded in Video Mode by a
different maker’s recorder but has not been
finalised, it cannot be played or additionally be
recorded by this DVD Recorder.
COPY PROTECTION
●
●
Do not use the following discs!
●
●
●
LD, CD-G, CD-I, Video-CD, CD-ROM and DVD-ROM
discs should not be used in this DVD Recorder.
[Note]
Disc types that can be played : CD/CD-R/CD-RW/
MP3/JPEG/MPEG4/DVD-Video/DVD-RW/DVD-R.
For a DVD-R/DVD-RW disc, which has been
recorded in Video Mode on another component, it
can play only when finalised.
Some commercial discs and DVD discs purchased
outside your region may not be playable with this DVD
Recorder. When these discs are played, either “No Disc”
or "Please check the regional code." will be displayed.
If your DVD-RW disc is an illegal copy or is not in
DVD video format, it may also not be playable.
Disc Compatibility
●
●
High Speed Recording discs can be used in this DVD
Recorder.
Not all brands of discs will be compatible with this
DVD Recorder.
Many DVD discs are encoded with copy protection.
Because of this, you should only connect your DVD
recorder directly to your TV, not to a VCR.
Connecting to a VCR results in a distorted picture
from copy-protected DVD discs.
This DVD Recorder incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected by methods
claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorised by
Macrovision Corporation, is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorised by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Protection
This DVD Recorder can allow you to protect the
contents of your discs, as described below.
● Programme-protected: See page 67
“Locking(Protecting) a Title”
● Disc-protected: See page 79 “Disc Protection”
✻ DVD-RW/DVD-R discs that are incompatible with the
DVD-VIDEO format cannot be played with this DVD
Recorder.
✻ For more information on DVD recording compatibility,
consult your DVD-RW/DVD-R manufacturer.
✻ Use of poor quality DVD-RW/DVD-R discs may
cause following unexpected problems including,
without limitation, recording failure, loss of recorded
or edited materials or damage to the DVD Recorder.
English -5
Getting Started
●
If you want to record the disc in VR Mode and then
record in V Mode, be sure to execute Format.
Be careful when executing Format because all the
recorded data may be lost.
A DVD-RW blank disc is initialized to VR Mode when
first initialized.
Getting Started
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 6
Contents
Other type of connecting the Audio output cable ..19
Case 1 : Connecting to your TV......................................19
Case 2 : Connecting to a stereo amplifier
with AV output jacks..........................................20
Case 3: Connecting to an AV amplifier with a digital
Getting Started
output jack ..........................................................20
Connecting to AV 2 IN, DV input jack...................21
Warning........................................................................2
Precaution ...................................................................3
Important Safety Instructions.............................................3
Case 1 : Connecting a VCR, Set-Top Box(STB), DVD
player or Camcorder to the AV 2 IN jacks.......21
Case 2 : Connecting a Camcorder to the DV IN jack ...21
Handling Cautions..............................................................3
Maintenance of Cabinet.....................................................3
System Setup
Disc Handling .....................................................................3
On-Screen Menu Navigation..................................22
Disc Storage .......................................................................4
Plug & Auto Set up ..................................................23
Disc Specifications .............................................................4
General Features........................................................8
Before reading the user’s manual...........................9
How to use the DVD Recorder.................................9
Unpacking .................................................................11
Setting the Clock......................................................24
Presetting Channels with
the Auto Setup function..........................................24
Presetting Channels with
the Manual Setup function .....................................25
Accessories.......................................................................11
Setting up the Language Options.........................26
Preparing the Remote Control.........................................11
EP Mode Time Setting.............................................27
Setting the Remote Control .............................................11
Description................................................................13
Automatic Chapter Creation ..................................28
DivX(R) Registration................................................29
Front Panel .......................................................................13
Setting up the Audio Options ................................29
Front Panel Display..........................................................13
Audio Options...................................................................29
Rear Panel........................................................................14
Setting up the Progressive scan...........................30
Tour of the Remote Control .............................................15
Canceling the Progressive scan ...........................31
Connecting & Setting Up
Setting up the Display(Video) Options.................31
Display(Video) Options ....................................................32
Quick Overview ........................................................16
Connecting the DVD Recorder .................................17
Other type of connecting the Video output cable ...17
Case 1 : Connecting to a Video (Composite)
output jack .........................................................18
Case 2 : Connecting to an S-Video output jack.............18
Case 3 : Component Video output jacks........................19
6- English
Setting up the Parental Control.............................32
If you forgot your password.............................................33
About the Rating Level ....................................................33
About the Change Password ..........................................34
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 7
Recording
Zooming-In........................................................................53
Recordable discs..............................................................35
Recording Formats ..........................................................36
Recording Mode...............................................................36
Unrecordable video..........................................................36
About INFO Button...........................................................37
Using Markers ..................................................................55
Playing an Audio CD/MP3 .....................................56
Playing an Audio CD (CD-DA)/MP3 ...............................56
Playing a Picture ......................................................60
Playing a MPEG4 .....................................................61
Playing the Title List................................................62
Checking the available disc space (Disc Information)...37
Recording the current TV programme you are
Editing
watching ....................................................................37
Recording from external equipment you are
watching ....................................................................39
Copying from a Camcorder ...................................40
Making a One Touch Recording (OTR)................41
Making a Timer Recording .....................................42
Flexible Recording (for Timer recording only) ...43
Editing the Scheduled Record List.......................43
Deleting the Scheduled Record List.....................44
Recording the Standard Timer List ......................45
Basic Editing (Title List) ...................................................66
Renaming(Labeling) a Title..............................................66
Locking(Protecting) a Title ...............................................67
Deleting a Title .................................................................67
Deleting a Section of a Title ............................................68
Advanced Editing (Playlist) .............................................70
Creating a Playlist ...........................................................70
Playing Entries in the Playlist .........................................71
Renaming a Playlist Entry ...............................................72
Editing a Scene for the Playlist .......................................73
Playback
Copying a Playlist Entry to the Playlist ...........................76
Deleting a Playlist Entry from the Playlist.......................77
Before Playing ..........................................................46
Region code (DVD-Video only).......................................46
Disc types that can be played .........................................46
Discs that cannot be played ............................................46
Playing a Disc...........................................................47
Using the Disc & Title Menu............................................48
Using the Search Functions ............................................48
Disc Manager ..............................................................78
Editing the Disc Name .....................................................78
Disc Protection .................................................................79
Formatting a Disc.............................................................79
Delete All Title Lists ..........................................................80
Finalising a disc................................................................81
Unfinalising a disc (V/VR mode) .....................................82
Slow Motion Play..............................................................49
Step Motion Play..............................................................49
Additional Information
About ANYKEY ................................................................49
Using the Repeat Function..............................................50
Selecting the Subtitle .......................................................52
Troubleshooting.......................................................83
Specifications...........................................................87
Selecting the Audio language..........................................52
Changing the Camera Angle...........................................53
English -7
Getting Started
Using Bookmarks.............................................................54
Before Recording.....................................................35
Getting Started
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 8
General Features
The DVD Recorder allows you to record and play high
quality digital video on DVD-RW/DVD-R discs. You can
record and edit digital images on DVD-RW/DVD-R
discs as if they were VCR tapes.
High quality digital audio and video recording
and playback
Record up to 8-hours of images with a 4.7 GB
DVD-RW/DVD-R disc, depending on the recording
mode.
High quality progressive scan
Progressive scanning provides high resolution and
flicker free video. The 10-bit 54-MHz DAC and 2D Y/C
Separating Circuitry provides the highest image
playback and recording quality. (See pages 19, 30~31)
A variety of functions with an easy-to-use user
interface
The integrated menu system and the messaging
function allow you to perform desired operations both
easily and conveniently. With a DVD-RW disc, you can
edit recorded video, create a playlist, edit video in a
specific sequence according to your requirements.
MPEG4 playback
This DVD Recorder can play MPEG4 formats within an
avi file.
DivX Certification
Selectable Recording Mode
You can set your recorder to one of four different
recording speeds, each varying in recording quality and
length. EP(6Hr or 8Hr) mode yields the most recording
time, LP & SP modes provide less recording time with
higher quality recording, XP mode gives you the highest
quality recording.
Automated Quality Adjustment for Timer
Recording
If FR mode is selected, the video quality is adjusted
automatically so that all video for the scheduled time
can be recorded onto the free disc space.
(See page 43.)
Creating a DVD video title using
DVD-RW/DVD-R disc
With the DVD Recorder, you can create your own DVD
Video titles on 4.7 GB DVD-RW/DVD-R discs.
Copying data from a digital camcorder using a
DV input jack
Record DV Device video onto DVD-RW, DVD-R discs
using the DV input jack (IEEE 1394-4pin/4pin).
(See page 40.)
8- English
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated
logos are trademarks of DivXNetworks,
Inc and are used under licence.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 9
Make sure to check the following terms before
reading the user’s manual.
How to use the DVD
Recorder
Step 1
Getting Started
Before reading the user’s
manual
Select the disc type
Icons that will be used in manual
Icon
This DVD Recorder can record on the following types
of discs.
If you want to repeatedly record on the same disc or
you want to edit the disc after recording, select a
rewritable DVD-RW type disc.
If you want to save recording without any change,
choose a non-rewritable DVD-R.
Term
Definition
DVD
This involves a function available
in DVD or DVD-R/DVD-RW
discs that have been recorded
and finalised in Video Mode.
RW
This involves a function available
in DVD-RW.
R
This involves a function available
in DVD-R.
CD
This involves a function available
in a data CD (CD-R or CD-RW).
JPEG
This involves a function available
in a data picture CD-R/-RW,
DVD-R/-RW.
MP3
This involves a function available
in a data CD-R/-RW,DVD-R/-RW.
MPEG4
This involves a function available
in a data CD-R/-RW,DVD-R/-RW.
Step 2
Caution
This involves a case where a
function does not operate or
settings may be cancelled.
Unlike a VCR, the DVD Recorder automatically starts
formatting when an unused disc is inserted. This is
required for the preparation of recording on a disc.
NOTE
This involves tips or instructions
on the page that help each
function operate.
One-Touch A function that can be operated
button
by using only one button.
ANYKEY A function that can be operated
button
by using ANYKEY button.
About the use of this user’s manual
1) Be sure to be familiar with Safety Instructions before
using this DVD Recorder. (See pages 2~5)
2) If a problem occurs, check for Troubleshooting.
(See pages 83~86)
Copyright
© 2006 Samsung Electronics Co.
All rights reserved; No part or whole of this user’s
manual may be reproduced or copied without the prior
written permission of Samsung Electronics Co.
Format the disc to start recording
Using a DVD-RW
This type of disc can be formatted in either DVD-Video
format (Video mode) or DVD-Video Recording format
(VR mode). For an unused disc, a message that asks
whether to format in VR Mode or not is displayed.
You can play a Video mode disc on various DVD
components. A VR mode disc allows more varied
editing.
Using a DVD-R
Formatting a disc is unnecessary and only Video
Mode Recording is supported. You can play this type
of discs on various DVD components only when they
have been finalised.
■
You can only use either the VR or
Video mode on a DVD-RW, but not
both at the same time.
■
You can change the DVD-RW
format to another format by
reinitializing. It should be noted that
the disc's data will be lost when
changing formats.
NOTE
English -9
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 10
Getting Started
Step 3
Recording
There are two different recording methods, Direct
Recording and Timer Recording. Timer recording is
classified as a Date : Once, Daily, MO-SA, MO-FR,
W-SA, etc.
Recording mode : XP (high quality mode), SP (standard
quality mode), LP (long recording mode), and EP
(extended mode) according to the recording mode. When
recording is set in the FR mode, the best quality picture is
recorded with regards to the remaining time on the disc.
Step 4
Playing
You can select the title you want to play in a displayed
menu and then immediately start playback.
A DVD consists of sections called titles, and sub
sections called chapters.
During recording, a title is created between two points
where you start and stop recording. Chapters will be
created automatically when you finalise recording on
DVD-R / DVD-RW discs in Video mode.
The chapter’s length (interval between chapters) varies
according to the recording mode.
Step 5
Editing a recorded disc
Editing on discs is easier than conventional video
tapes. The DVD Recorder supports many different edit
functions, possible only with DVDs.
With a simple and easy edit menu, you can operate
various edit functions, such as delete, copy, rename,
lock, etc., on a recorded title.
Creating a playlist (DVD-RW in VR mode)
With this DVD Recorder, you can create a new playlist
on the same disc and edit it without the change of the
original recording.
10- English
Step 6
Finalising & Playing on other DVD components
To play your DVD on other DVD components,
finalising may be necessary. First, finish all editing and
recording operations, then finalise the disc.
When using a DVD-RW disc in VR Mode
Although finalising is generally unnecessary when
playing the disc on a VR Mode compatible component,
a finalised disc should be used for playback.
When using a DVD-RW disc in Video Mode
The disc should be finalised first to enable playback on
anything other than this DVD Recorder. No more
editing or recording can be made on the disc once it
has been finalised.
When using a DVD-R disc
You should finalise the disc to play it on a component
other than this DVD Recorder. You cannot edit or
record on the disc once it has been finalised.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 11
Getting Started
Unpacking
Accessories
Setting the Remote Control
Check for the supplied accessories below.
You can control certain functions of another
manufacturer’s TV with this remote control.
Control function buttons involve: STANDBY/ON,
PROG / , VOL +/-, Direct Number buttons,
TV MUTE, INPUT SEL. button.
Video/Audio Cable
Remote Control
Instruction Manual
RF Cable for TV
Batteries for Remote
Control (AAA Size)
Quick Guide
Preparing the Remote Control
Install Batteries in the Remote Control
●
●
●
Open the battery cover on the back of the remote
control.
Insert two AAA batteries. Make sure that the polarities
(+ and -) are aligned correctly.
Replace the battery cover.
If the remote does not operate properly:
●
●
●
●
Check the polarity + - of the batteries (Dry-Cell)
Check if the batteries are drained.
Check if remote sensor is blocked by obstacles.
Check if there is any fluorescent lighting nearby.
Dispose of batteries according to local
environmental regulations. Do not put them in the
household trash.
English -11
Getting Started
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 12
To determine whether your television is
compatible, follow the instructions below.
1. Switch your television on.
2. Point the remote control towards the television.
3. Press and hold the STANDBY/ON button and enter
the two-figure code corresponding to the brand of
your television, by pressing the appropriate number
buttons.
Controllable TV Codes
BRAND
SAMSUNG
AIWA
ANAM
BANG & OLUFSEN
BLAUPUNKT
BRANDT
BRIONVEGA
CGE
CONTINENTAL EDISON
DAEWOO
EMERSON
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FORMENTI
FUJITSU
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
IMPERIAL
JVC
LG
LOEWE
LOEWE OPTA
MAGNAVOX
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
NEWSAN
NOBLEX
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
RADIOLA
RADIOMARELLI
RCA
REX
SABA
SALORA
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
12- English
BUTTON
01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09
82
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
57
71
73
57
52
75
19, 20, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34
64
73
06, 49, 57
57
84
70
49, 52, 71
60, 72, 73, 75
52
61, 79
06, 19, 20, 21, 22, 78
06, 69
06, 57
40
57
06, 48, 62, 65
52, 77
83
68
66
74
72, 73, 75
53, 54, 74, 75
06, 55, 56, 57
06, 56, 57
58, 59, 73, 74
06, 56
57
45, 46
74
57, 72, 73, 74, 75
74
41, 42, 43, 44, 48
06
BRAND
SELECO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SINGER
SINUDYNE
SONY
TELEAVA
TELEFUNKEN
THOMSON
THOMSON ASIA
TOSHIBA
WEGA
YOKO
ZENITH
BUTTON
74
36, 37, 38, 39, 48
71
57
57
35, 48
73
67, 73, 75, 76
72, 73, 75
80, 81
47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52
57
06
63
Result: If your television is compatible with the remote
control, it will switch off.
It is now programmed to operate with the
remote control.
■
If several codes are indicated for your
television brand, try each one in turn until
you find one that works.
■
If you replace the remote control's
batteries, you must set the brand code
again.
NOTE
Then you can control the television using the
following buttons after the TV button.
Button
Function
STANDBY/ON
INPUT SEL.
VOL (+ or -)
PROG ( or )
TV MUTE
0~9
Used to switch the television on and off.
Used to select an external source.
Used to adjust the volume of the television.
Used to select the desired channel.
Used to toggle the sound on and off.
Used to input number directly.
■
NOTE
The various functions will not necessarily
work on all televisions. If you encounter
problems, operate the television directly.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 13
Getting Started
Description
Front Panel
1. STANDBY/ON
Turns the DVD Recorder on and off.
2. AV 2 IN
Connect external equipment.
3. DV IN
Connects external digital equipment with a DV
jack. (such as a camcorder)
4. DISC TRAY
Opens to accept a disc.
5. OPEN/CLOSE
Opens and closes the disc tray.
6. DISPLAY
Displays the playing status, title/chapter/time, etc.
7. SEARCH/SKIP
Go to the next title/chapter/track or go back to the
previous title/chapter/track.
8. PLAY/PAUSE
Plays a disc or pauses playback/recording.
9. P.SCAN
Selects the progressive scan mode.
10. PROG (
)
Select TV preset Channels.
Same as PROG button on the remote control.
11. REC
Starts recording.
12. STOP
Stops disc playback.
Front Panel Display
1. Lights when a disc is loaded.
2. Lights in the record mode.
3. Lights to indicate the timer record mode.
4. Lights when a DVD-R/-RW disc is loaded.
5. Playing time/clock/current status indicator.
6. Lights in the progressive scan mode.
English -13
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 14
Getting Started
Rear Panel
1. RF IN / RF OUT
Connects antenna cables.
2. DIGITAL AUDIO OUT(OPTICAL)
Connects to an amplifier having a digital optical
audio input jack.
3. DIGITAL AUDIO OUT(COAXIAL)
Connects to an amplifier having a digital coaxial
audio input jack.
4. AUDIO OUT
Connects to the audio input of external equipment
using audio cables.
5. VIDEO OUT(good video quality)
Connects the input of external equipment using a
Video cable.
6. S-VIDEO OUT(better video quality)
Connects the input of external equipment using an
S-Video cable.
7. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(best video quality)
Connects to equipment having Component video
input jacks.
8. AV 1 AUDIO IN
Connect the output of external equipment using
audio cables
9. AV 1 VIDEO IN
Connects the output of external equipment using a
video cable.
10. AV 1 S-VIDEO IN
Connects the output of external equipment using
a S-Video cable.
■
NOTE
14- English
The Antenna connection does not pass
output signal of DVD. To watch a DVD on
your TV, you must connect audio/video
cables.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 15
Tour of the Remote Control
28
29
1
16
17
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
19
20
9
10
21
11
12
13
14
15
22
23
24
25
1. STANDBY/ON Button
2. 0~9(Number) Buttons
3. TV/DVD Button
You can not use this button.
4. Reverse/Forward Skip Buttons
Press to skip a disc backwards or forwards.
5. Reverse/Forward Step Buttons
Press to play frame by frame.
6. Reverse/Forward Search Buttons
Press to search a disc backwards or forwards.
7. STOP Button
Press to stop a disc.
8. VOL Buttons
Volume adjustments.
9. AUDIO/TV MUTE Button
Use this to access various audio functions on a
disc.(DVD mode)
This operates as Sound Mute. (TV mode)
10. MENU Button
Brings up the DVD recorder’s setup menu.
11. OK/DIRECTION (›‚¥Š) Buttons
12. TITLE LIST/DISC MENU Button
Use this to enter the View Recording list/Disc menu.
English -15
Getting Started
26
27
13. ANYKEY Button
Use this to view the status of the disc that is being
played.
14. REC Button
Use to make a recording on DVD-RW/-R discs.
15. REC MODE Button
This will display the recording status.(XP/SP/LP/EP)
16. REPEAT Button
Allows you to repeat a title, chapter, track or disc.
17. OPEN/CLOSE Button
To open and close the disc tray.
18. SUBTITLE Button
Press this to switch the DVD’s subtitle language.
19. PLAY/PAUSE Button
Press to play a disc or pause playback/recording.
20. PROG Buttons
Select preset channels in a specific order.
Same as PROG buttons in front panel.
21. RETURN Button
Returns to a previous menu.
22. PLAY LIST/TITLE MENU Button
Use this to return to the Title menu, or to view the
recorded files list.
23. CANCEL Button
24. MARKER/TIMER Button
Use this to bookmark a position while playing a
disc.
Press to directly enter the Timer Recording Mode
menu while stopping a disc.
25. INFO Button
This will display current settings or disc status.
26. TV Button
Press this to operate TV.
27. DVD Button
Press this when you use a DVD recorder.
28. INPUT SEL. Button
Select line input signal in external input mode
(PROG, AV input or DV INPUT)
29. ZOOM Button
Press this to enlarge the screen.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_02~16 3/3/06 5:55 PM Page 16
Connecting & Setting Up
Quick Overview
Connecting
& Setting Up
This section involves various methods of
connecting the DVD Recorder to other external
components and required initial setting modes.
A Quick Overview presented in this guide will give you
enough information to start using the DVD Recorder.
Connecting the DVD Recorder
†
Other type of connecting the
Video output cable
†
Other type of connecting the Audio
output cable
†
Connecting to AV 2 IN, DV input jack
Quick Overview.................................................16
Connecting the DVD Recorder ..........................17
Other type of connecting the
Video output cable............................................17
Other type of connecting the Audio output cable....19
Connecting to AV 2 IN, DV input jack .............21
16- English
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 17
Connecting the DVD
Recorder
Other type of connecting
the Video output cable
2. Connect
of the DVD Recorder and the aerial
input of your TV using the supplied aerial cable.
3. Use the Video/Audio Cable to connect ANALOG
AUDIO OUT(R/L)/VIDEO OUT jacks on the DVD
Recorder to the Audio &Video jacks on the TV.
4. Plug in the DVD Recorder and TV.
There are several ways to output video signal.
Select one of the following video connecting that best
suits you below.
Case 1 : Connecting to a Video (Composite) output
jack
● Case 2 : Connecting to an S-Video output jack
● Case 3 : Component Video output jacks
●
S-Video, Component video and Progressive
Output Modes
●
5. Turn on the DVD Recorder and TV.
6. Press the INPUT SEL. button on your TV remote
control until the Video signal from the DVD Recorder
appears on the TV screen.
●
Wall
DVD Recorder
or
●
S-Video and Component video output are available
only if your TV supports S-Video input or Component
video input, respectively. If S-Video or Component
video output does not work, check the TV
connections and the TV input selection settings.
Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive
scan doubles the amount of video lines fed to your
TV, resulting in a more stable, flicker-free, clear
image than interlaced video.
This is only available with TVs that support
progressive scan.
Progressive Scan Output (576p)
Consumers should note that not all high definition
television sets are fully compatible with this DVD
Recorder and may cause artifacts to be displayed in
the picture, in case of 576 progressive scan picture
problems, It is recommended that the user switch the
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output. If there
are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with
this model 576p DVD Recorder, please contact our
customer service centre.
or
TV
■
The RF cable connection of this DVD
Recorder sends only signals of TV.
You must connect Audio/Video cables to
watch a signal from your DVD Recorder.
■
To watch TV programmes, power off the
DVD Recorder.
NOTE
English -17
Connecting & Setting Up
1. Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV and
connect it to
on the rear panel of the DVD
Recorder.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 18
Case 1 : Connecting to a Video
(Composite) output jack
Connecting & Setting Up
1. Connect a video(yellow) cable between the VIDEO
(yellow) OUT jack on DVD Recorder and VIDEO
(yellow) INPUT jack on your TV (or AV amplifier).
● You will enjoy regular quality images.
2. Connect audio cables (white and red) between the
AUDIO OUT jacks on the DVD Recorder and AUDIO
IN jacks on TV (or AV amplifier).
(See page 19 to 20)
yellow
Video/Audio Cable
18- English
yellow
Case 2 : Connecting to an
S-Video output jack
1. Connect an S-Video cable (not included) between the
S-VIDEO OUT jack on DVD Recorder and S-VIDEO
INPUT jack on your TV (or AV amplifier).
2. Connect audio cables (white and red) between the AV
AUDIO OUT jacks on DVD Recorder and AUDIO IN
jacks on TV (or AV amplifier).
● You will enjoy high quality images.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 19
Case 3 : Component Video
output jacks
Other type of connecting
the Audio output cable
1. Connect Component video cables(not supplied)
between the COMPONENT OUT(Y,PB,PR) jacks on
DVD Recorder and COMPONENT IN(Y,PB,PR) jacks
on your TV.
3. After connecting, refer to the pages 30~31.
● You will enjoy high quality and accurate colour
reproduction images.
There are several ways to output audio signal.
Select the audio connection that best suits you below.
Case 1 : Connecting to your TV
Case 2 : Connecting to a stereo amplifier with AV
output jacks
● Case 3 : Connecting to an AV amplifier with a
digital output jack
●
●
Manufactured under licence from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
2
green
green
blue
red
COMPONENT
Y
blue
Pb
1
red
Case 1 : Connecting to your TV
If your TV has audio input jacks, use this connection.
Pr
■
NOTE
yellow
white
Progressive setting is only available when
the DVD Recorder is connected to your
TV using component cables.
yellow
red
■
Make sure that the colour coded
connections match. The Y, PB, PR
component output jacks of your DVD
Recorder must be connected to the exact
corresponding component input jacks on
your TV.
white
red
English -19
Connecting & Setting Up
2. Connect audio cables (white and red) between the
AUDIO OUT jacks on the DVD Recorder and AUDIO
IN jacks on TV (or AV amplifier).
(See page 19 to 20).
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 20
Case 2 : Connecting to a stereo
amplifier with AV output jacks
Connecting & Setting Up
If your stereo amplifier only has AUDIO INPUT
jacks(L and R), use the AUDIO OUT jacks.
red
white
red
white
Front(L)
speaker
Front(R)
speaker
Case 3: Connecting to an AV
amplifier with a digital
output jack
If your AV amplifier has a Dolby Digital, MPEG2 or
DTS decoder and a digital input jack, use this
connection. To enjoy Dolby Digital, MPEG2 or DTS
sound, you will need to set up the audio settings.
(See pages 29~30)
or
Rear(L)
Rear(R)
Front(L)
Front(R)
Subwoofer
20- English
Centre
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 21
Connecting to AV 2 IN, DV
input jack
Case 2 : Connecting a
Camcorder to the DV IN jack
If your digital camcorder has a DV output jack, connect
it to the DV input jack of your DVD Recorder.
This allows you to connect your DVD Recorder to other
external devices and view or record their outputs.
●
Case 1 : Connecting a VCR, Set-Top Box(STB), DVD
player or Camcorder to the AV 2 IN jacks
Case 2 : Connecting a Camcorder to the DV IN jack
Connecting & Setting Up
●
Camcorder
Case 1 : Connecting a VCR,
Set-Top Box(STB), DVD player
or Camcorder to the AV 2 IN
jacks
Connecting a VCR or external device to AV 2 IN jacks
of the DVD Recorder.
You can record from connected equipment (VCR, STB,
DVD player or Camcorder).
■
NOTE
If the input is not selected automatically,
use INPUT SEL. button to select proper
input.
Camcorder
VCR
red
DVD
white
yellow
STB
yellow
white
red
■
AV 2 IN selection will be automatically
done. If the input is not selected
automatically, use INPUT SEL. button to
select proper input.
■
Copy protected content cannot be
recorded.
NOTE
English -21
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 22
System
Setup
On-Screen Menu
Navigation
The on-screen menus allow you to enable or disable
various functions on your DVD Recorder.
Use the following buttons to open and navigate through
the on-screen menus.
DVD-Recorder
Programme
No Disc
Programme
DVD-Recorder
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Scheduled Record List
√
Title List
Title List
√
Playlist
Setup
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
System Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
MOVE
OK
RETURN
1 MENU Button
Press this button on the remote control to open the
on-screen MENU.
Press again to exit the on-screen MENU.
2 … / † , œ / √ Buttons
Press these buttons on remote control to move the
selection bar … / † , œ / √ to cycle through the menu
options.
3 OK Button
Press this button on the remote control to confirm any
new settings.
On-Screen Menu Navigation......................22
Plug & Auto Set up.....................................23
Setting the Clock ........................................24
Presetting Channels with the
Auto Setup function....................................24
Presetting Channels with
the Manual Setup function .........................25
Setting Up the Language Options..............26
EP Mode Time Setting ...............................27
Automatic Chapter Creation.......................28
DivX(R) Registration...................................29
Setting Up the Audio Options.....................29
Setting up the Progressive scan ................30
Canceling the Progressive scan.................31
Setting up the Display(Video) Options .......31
Setting up the Parental Control..................32
22- English
4 RETURN Button
Press this button on the remote control to return to the
Previous MENU screen displayed or to exit the
on-screen MENU.
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/15/06 11:02 AM Page 23
Plug & Auto Set up
5 Auto Channel scan will be started.
Auto channel memory
17%
Stop
Your DVD Recorder will automatically set itself up when
it is plugged in for the first time. TV stations and clock
will be stored in memory. The process takes a few
minutes. Your DVD Recorder will then be ready for use.
the RF cable as indicated on
1 Connect
page 17.
(Connecting Your DVD Recorder to the TV Using the RF
Cable and Video/Audio cable.)
2
• The number of stations automatically stored by the DVD
Recorder depends on the number of stations that it has found.
6 Check the date and time.
DVD-Recorder
Plug the DVD Recorder into the mains.
Auto Setup
No Disc
“Auto” in the front panel display flickers.
JAN
Time
01
2006
12
System Setup
Date
00
SUN
MOVE
the language using the …† buttons,
3 Select
then press the OK button.
DVD-Recorder
Auto Setup
No Disc
Language Set
English
Français
OK
RETURN
• if it is : Correct, press the OK button then the date and time
will be saved. If you don't press the OK button, the
date and time will be saved automatically after 5
seconds.
• if it is : Incorrect, input correct Time, Date, Year using …†œ √
buttons or number buttons. Press the OK button then
the date and time will be saved. When you need to
change clock setting, you can set up it manually.
(see page 24)
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Nederlands
MOVE
OK
■
Now, DVD Recorder is ready for use. Function for
“Plug & Auto Set Up” is fixed already. So if you
want to change this fixed one, you can change it
by Presetting the Stations in OSD “Presetting
Channels with the Manual set up function” menu.
(see page 25)
■
Auto Setup function can be performed by pressing
and holding down the PROG (
) buttons on
the front panel of the DVD Recorder
simultaneously for more than 5 seconds with no
disc in the DVD Recorder.
RETURN
NOTE
the OK button or wait for a few
4 Press
seconds to start the auto setup.
DVD-Recorder
Auto Setup
No Disc
Auto setup will be started.
Check antenna and TV cable connection.
OK
RETURN
English -23
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 24
Setting the Clock
Presetting Channels with
the Auto Setup function
This menu is used to set the current time.
You need to set the time to use timer recording.
This feature allows you to manually set the DVD
Recorder tuner band to Antenna or Cable, whichever
you connected to the Antenna In jack during initial
setup.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
1 With
DVD-Recorder
Programme
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
1 With
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
No Disc
Programme
Scheduled Record List
√
DVD-Recorder
Setup
Programme
No Disc
Programme
Scheduled Record List
√
System Setup
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
MOVE
the …† buttons to select Setup, then
press the OK or √ button.
2 Press
DVD-Recorder
Setup
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Setup, then
2 press
the OK or √ button.
No Disc
Programme
System
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
Language
√
No Disc
Audio
√
Programme
System
√
Video
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
Parental Control
√
Language
√
Install
√
Audio
√
Video
√
Parental Control
√
MOVE
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
Setup
Install
MOVE
the …† buttons to select Clock Set,
then press the OK or √ button.
3 Press
Use the …†œ √ buttons to input Time, Date or Year.
Use number buttons to input clock data directly. The
day of the week is displayed automatically.
DVD-Recorder
Clock Set
√
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Install, then
3 press
the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Install
No Disc
No Disc
Programme
Setup
OK
Date
JAN
Time
01
2006
12
Programme
Auto Setup
√
Setup
Manual Setup
√
00
SUN
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the OK button, then the date and
time will be saved.
4 Press
If you don’t press the OK button, it will not be saved.
24- English
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 25
the …† buttons to select Auto
4 Press
Setup, then press the OK or √ button.
The message “Your data will be lost. Press [OK] to
continue, [MENU] to exit.” is displayed.
DVD-Recorder
Presetting Channels with
the Manual Setup function
Install
No Disc
Programme
Auto Setup
√
Setup
Manual Setup
√
Your data will be lost.
You can add preset channel that Auto Channel Search
missed. And you can delete a channel you wish to
remove. You can programme the order of channels.
Press [OK] to continue, [MENU] to exit.
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
1 With
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
5 Press the OK button to continue.
If you want to exit, press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
Programme
No Disc
Programme
Scheduled Record List
√
System Setup
Setup
Auto channel memory
17%
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Stop
Press the …† buttons to select Setup, then
2 press
the OK or √ button.
6 Channel scan will be started.
Press the OK button to stop the Auto Setup.
DVD-Recorder
Setup
No Disc
Programme
System
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
Language
√
Audio
√
Video
√
Parental Control
√
Install
MOVE
OK
√
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Install, then
3 press
the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Install
No Disc
Programme
Auto Setup
√
Setup
Manual Setup
√
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
English -25
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 26
the …† buttons to select Manual
4 Press
Setup, then press the OK or √ button.
PR
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
--------------MOVE
Manual Setup
Name
OK
Setting up the Language
Options
Edit
----------------------
√
RETURN
EXIT
√
√
√
√
√
√
the …† buttons to select a PR
5 Press
(programme) you wish to edit, delete, or
swap, then press the OK or √ button.
Select Edit, Delete or Swap using the …†
buttons, then press the OK or √ button.
If you set the audio, subtitle, disc menu, on-screen
menu and DivX subtitle language in advance, they
will come up automatically every time you watch a
movie.
If the selected language is not recorded on the disc,
the original pre-recorded language is selected.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
1 With
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
Programme
System Setup
No Disc
Programme
PR
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
--------------MOVE
Manual Setup
Name
---------------------OK
Edit
Edit
Delete
Swap
RETURN
Scheduled Record List
√
Setup
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXIT
• Edit : You can add or edit PR(programme).
After changing PR informations(CH, Name, MFT),
select Done, then press the OK button.
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Setup, then
2 press
the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Setup
No Disc
Manual Setup
01
PR
œ1√
CH
---Name
--- --MFT
Programme
System
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
Language
√
Audio
√
Video
√
Parental Control
√
Done
MOVE
Install
OK
MOVE
- CH : Tune the channel using œ √ buttons.
- Name : Display station name automatically detected
in broadcasting signal. If not detected, you
can edit name by using …†œ √ buttons.
- MFT : You can tune up the channel frequency better
using œ √ buttons.
26- English
√
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Language,
3 then
press the OK or √ button.
Language setup menu will be displayed.
DVD-Recorder
Language
No Disc
Programme
Audio
: Original
√
Setup
Subtitle
: Automatic
√
Disc Menu
: English
√
On-Screen Menu : English
√
DivX Subtitle
√
• Delete : The channel information of selected
PR(programme) will be removed.
• Swap : You can swap the channel information of two
PR(programme). For example, if you wish to swap PR2
and PR5, select swap at PR2, then press the OK
button at PR5.
OK
MOVE
OK
: Western
RETURN
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 27
the …† buttons to select the desired
4 Press
language option, then press the OK or √
button.
●
●
●
●
●
Western
Afrikaans, Basque, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
English, Faeroese, Finnish, French, German,
Icelandic, Indonesian, Italian, Malay, Norwegian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Swahili and Swedish
Central
English, Albanian, Croatian, Czech, Hungarian,
Polish, Romanian, Serbian(Latin), Slovak and
Slovenian
Greek
English and Greek
Cyrillic
English, Azeri, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Kazakh,
Macedonian, Russian, Serbian, Tatar, Ukrainian
and Uzbek
Press the …† buttons to select the desired
language, then press the OK or √ button.
You can select one of four recording modes by pressing
the REC MODE button repeatedly. EP mode is one of four
REC Mode (XP,SP,LP,EP). In EP(Extended Play) mode,
you can set recording time to 6 or 8 hours by this setting.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
1 With
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
Programme
No Disc
Programme
Scheduled Record List
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Setup, then
the OK or √ button.
2 press
DVD-Recorder
Setup
No Disc
DVD-Recorder
Language
Programme
System
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
No Disc
Programme
Audio
Setup
Subtitle
: Original
English
: Automatic
Français
: Deutsch
English
Disc Menu
On-Screen Menu
DivX Subtitle
MOVE
√
Setup
OK
: Español
English
Italiano
Western
Nederlands
Korean
RETURN
…
√
Language
√
√
Audio
√
√
Video
√
√
Parental Control
√
Install
√
†
MOVE
√
OK
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
the …† buttons to select System,
3 Press
then press the OK or √ button.
System menu will be displayed.
■
NOTE
Press the RETURN or œ button to return
to the previous menu.
Press the MENU button to exit the menu.
■
The selected language will only appear if
it is supported on the disc.
■
If the subtitle language is displayed in
broken fonts, change DivX Subtitle to the
appropriate region.
If it still does not work, the format is not
supported.
DVD-Recorder
System
No Disc
Programme
EP Mode Time
: 6 Hours
√
Setup
Chapter Creator
: Off
√
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select EP Mode
4 Time,
then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
System
No Disc
Programme
EP Mode Time
6 Hours
6: Hours
√
Setup
Chapter Creator
8Off
Hours
√
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select the desired
5 Press
time, then press the OK or √ button.
English -27
System Setup
5
Audio : For the speaker sound.
Subtitle : For the disc subtitles.
Disc Menu : For the disc menu
contained on the disc
On-Screen Menu : For the screen of your DVD
Recorder
DivX Subtitle : Selecting a supported DivX subtitle
language by region.
EP Mode Time Setting
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 28
Press the …† buttons to select On or Off,
5 then
press the OK or √ button.
Automatic Chapter
Creation
• Off : Select this option when you do not want
(Automatic Chapter Creation).
• On : Select this option when you want (Automatic
Chapter Creation).
A DVD-Video consists of ‘Titles’ and ‘Chapters’. When you
record one programme, it makes one Title.
If you use this function, the title will be divided into chapers.
the REC button to start recording.
6 Press
(See page 37 about how to set recording
mode) The message “Do you want to
create the chapter menu after this
recording?” is displayed.
(V mode)
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the MENU button.
Do you want to create the chapter menu
DVD-Recorder
Title List
after this recording?
DVD-RW(V)
Title List
Title List
Yes
√
No
System Setup
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
MOVE
2
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the œ √ buttons to select Yes and
the OK button.
7 press
• A new chapter is created according to the selected
recording mode. A chapter will be about 5 minutes long
in XP and SP, and about 15 minutes long in LP and EP
mode.
Press the …† buttons to select Setup, then
press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Setup
DVD-RW(V)
Title List
System
√
Disc Manager Clock Set
√
Language
√
Audio
√
Video
√
Parental Control
√
Programme
Setup
Install
MOVE
OK
8 Press the STOP button to stop recording.
√
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select System,
3 Press
then press the OK or √ button.
display the created chapters, finalise the
(see page 81) and then press the
9 Todisc
DISC MENU button. The chapter menu will
be displayed.
System menu will be displayed.
DVD-Recorder
1/1
System
1
DVD-RW(V)
Title List
EP Mode Time
Disc Manager Chapter Creator
: 6 Hours
√
: Off
√
2
3
Programme
Setup
Previous
MOVE
OK
RETURN
System
DVD-RW(V)
Title List
EP Mode Time
Disc Manager Chapter Creator
: 6 Hours
√
: Off
Off
√
On
Programme
Setup
MOVE
28- English
OK
RETURN
Next
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Chapter
4 Press
Creator, then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Top
EXIT
■
The Automatic Chapter Creation function
does not work during Timer Recording or
when you turn the power off.
■
DVD-R discs cannot be unfinalised.
CAUTION
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 29
DivX(R) Registration
the …† buttons to select the desired
4 Press
audio option, then press the OK or √
button.
DVD-Recorder
Audio
No Disc
Please use the Registration code to register this DVD
Recorder with the DivX(R) Video On Demand format.
For more information, visit www.divx.com/vod
Programme Digital Output
: PCM
√
Setup
: Bitstream
Off
√
MOVE
Setting up the Audio
Options
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
1 With
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
√
NICAM
√
OK
: On
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select the desired
5 Press
item, then press the OK or √ button.
■
NOTE
Press the RETURN or œ button to return
to the previous menu.
Press the MENU button to exit the menu.
Audio Options
Programme
No Disc
Programme
Dynamic Compression : On
Scheduled Record List
√
Digital Output
Setup
1. PCM :
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Setup, then
2 Press
press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Select this when you have no equipment that
can decode Dolby Digital (or MPEG-2) signal.
When you play Dolby Digital (or MPEG-2)
sound track, the digital output are converted to
PCM Stereo.
2. Bitstream : Output Dolby Digital (or MPEG-2) audio as
bitstream. Select this when your AV
receiver or AV amplifier have Dolby Digital
(or MPEG-2) Decoder.
Setup
No Disc
Programme
System
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
Language
√
Audio
√
Video
√
Parental Control
√
Install
MOVE
OK
√
RETURN
Audio setup menu will be displayed.
Audio
No Disc
Programme
Digital Output
: PCM
√
Setup
DTS
MOVE
: Off
√
Dynamic Compression : On
√
NICAM
√
OK
: On
RETURN
Digital output setting is equally applied to
both Dolby Digital and MPEG-2 audio.
LPCM sound track is always outputted as
PCM. It has no relation with Digital Output
setting.
■
Be sure to select the correct Digital
Output or you will hear no sound or loud
noise.
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Audio, then
3 press
the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
■
NOTE
DTS
1. Off : Doesn’t output DTS signal.
Select this when your AV receiver or AV
amplifier does not have DTS decoder.
2. On : Outputs DTS Bitstream via digital output when you
play DTS track.
Select this only when your AV receiver (or AV
amplifier) have DTS decoder.
EXIT
■
NOTE
When DTS soundtrack is played, sound
does not output from AV Audio Output.
English -29
System Setup
You can connect the DVD Recorder to an external amp
or Home Theatre.
Allow you to setup the Audio device and sound status
depending on the audio system in use.
DTS
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 30
Dynamic Compression
This is only active when a Dolby Digital signal is
detected.
1. On : When Movie soundtracks are played at low
volume or from smaller speakers, the system
can apply appropriate compression to make
low-level content more intelligible and prevent
dramatic passages from getting too loud.
2. Off : You can enjoy the movie with the standard
Dynamic Range.
System Setup
NICAM
NICAM programmes are divided into 3 types. NICAM
Stereo, NICAM Mono and Bilingual (transmission in
another language). NICAM programmes are always
accompanied by a standard mono sound broadcast and
you can select the desired sound by setting NICAM on
or off.
1. On : NICAM mode
2. Off : Only set at this position to record the standard
mono sound during a NICAM broadcast if the
stereo sound is distorted due to inferior
reception conditions.
Setting up the Progressive
scan
If the TV supports Progressive Scan, press the
P.SCAN button on the front of the DVD Recorder to
enjoy.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the P.SCAN button on the front of the
1 With
DVD Recorder.
The message “Press [Yes] to confirm Progressive
scan mode. Otherwise press [No]” will appear.
Press [Yes] to confirm Progressive scan mode.
Otherwise press [No]
Yes
No
the œ √ buttons to select Yes, and
2 Press
then press the OK button.
your TV to Progressive input (using the
3 Set
TV remote control.)
■
Do not press the P.SCAN button if you
are using a TV that does not support
Progressive mode. Nothing will be
displayed on the screen if pressed.
■
Progressive setting is only available when
the DVD Recorder is connected to your
TV using component cables.
■
If the P.SCAN button on the DVD recorder’s
front panel is pressed during playback, the
prohibition mark( ) appears on the screen.
■
Progressive setting is only available when
the DVD recorder is in stop mode.
NOTE
30- English
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 31
Canceling the Progressive
scan
Setting up the
Display(Video) Options
This function allows you to setup the TV screen settings.
1
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the P.SCAN button on the front of the
DVD Recorder.
The message “Press [Yes] to confirm Interlace scan
mode. Otherwise press [No]” will appear.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
1 With
DVD-Recorder
Programme
No Disc
Programme
Scheduled Record List
√
Setup
Press [Yes] to confirm Interlace scan mode.
Otherwise press [No]
Yes
No
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the œ √ buttons to select Yes, and
2 Press
then press the OK button.
3
DVD-Recorder
Programme
System
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
Language
√
Audio
√
Video
√
Parental Control
√
Set your TV to Interlace input (using the
TV remote control.)
Install
MOVE
■
NOTE
Setup
No Disc
If you press the P.SCAN button by
mistake when your TV does not support
Progressive mode, you need to release
the Progressive mode. To release the
Progressive mode, press the P.SCAN
button on the front panel 2 times. The
screen will recover after the PS LED
on the front panel display turns off.
OK
√
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Video, then
3 Press
press the OK or √ button.
Video setup menu will be displayed.
DVD-Recorder
Video
No Disc
Programme
TV Aspect
Setup
3D Noise Reduction: Off
√
DivX(R) Registration
√
MOVE
OK
: 16:9 Wide
RETURN
√
EXIT
the …† buttons to select the desired
4 Press
video option, then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Video
No Disc
Programme
TV Aspect
Setup
3D Noise Reduction :4:3
OffPan-Scan
√
DivX(R) Registration 16:9 Wide
√
MOVE
OK
:4:3
4:3LetterBox
Letter Box
RETURN
√
EXIT
the …† buttons to select the desired
5 Press
item, then press the OK or √ button.
English -31
System Setup
the …† buttons to select Setup, then
press the OK or √ button.
2 Press
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 32
■
NOTE
Press the RETURN or œ button to return
to the previous menu. Press the MENU
button to exit the menu.
Display(Video) Options
This function depends on disc type. It may not work for
some disc types.
Setting up the Parental
Control
The Parental Control function works in conjunction with
DVDs that have been assigned a rating which helps
you control the types of DVDs that your family watches.
There are up to 8 rating levels on a disc.
TV Aspect
Depending on the type of television you have, you may
want to adjust the screen setting. (aspect ratio)
DVD-Recorder
Video
No Disc
System Setup
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode/No
1 With
Disc mode, press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
Programme
TV Aspect
Setup
√
No Disc
3D Noise Reduction :4:3
OffPan-Scan
√
Programme
DivX(R) Registration 16:9 Wide
√
Setup
MOVE
OK
:4:3
4:3LetterBox
Letter Box
RETURN
Programme
Scheduled Record List
√
EXIT
MOVE
• 4:3 LetterBox : Select when you want to see the total
16:9 ratio screen DVD supplies, even
though you have a TV with a 4:3 ratio
screen.
Black bars will appear at the top and
bottom of the screen.
• 4:3 Pan-Scan : Select this for conventional size TV when
you want to see the central portion of the
16:9 screen. (Extreme left and right side
of movie picture will be cut off.)
• 16:9 Wide : You can view the full 16:9 picture on your
widescreen TV.
OK
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Setup, then
2 Press
press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Setup
No Disc
Programme
System
√
Setup
Clock Set
√
Language
√
Audio
√
Video
√
Parental Control
√
Install
MOVE
3D Noise Reduction (motion adaptive noise
reduction)
RETURN
√
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Parental
3 Press
Control, then press the OK or √ button.
The ‘Create the password’ message will be displayed.
DVD-Recorder
Video
DVD-Recorder
No Disc
√
No Disc
3D Noise Reduction :Off
Off
√
Programme
DivX(R) Registration On
√
Setup
Programme TV Aspect
Setup
MOVE
OK
: 16:9 Wide
RETURN
●
On : Provides a cleaner picture through noise
reduction (for recording).
Off : Normal
32- English
Create the password
EXIT
0~9
●
Parental Control
NUMBER
OK
RETURN
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 33
the 4-digit password using the 0 to 9
4 Enter
buttons on the remote control.
The ‘Confirm the password’ message will be displayed.
Enter your password again.
DVD-Recorder
Parental Control
About the Rating Level
Press the …† buttons to select Rating
1 Level.
No Disc
Programme
DVD-Recorder
Setup
Confirm the password
Parental Control
No Disc
Programme
Password
: On
√
Setup
Rating Level
: Level 1 Kids
√
Change Password
0~9
NUMBER
OK
RETURN
EXIT
MOVE
the OK or √ button to select
5 Press
Password.
DVD-Recorder
√
Parental Control
OK
RETURN
EXIT
2 Press the OK or √ button.
The rating level will be displayed.
No Disc
Password
ffOff
√
On
Setup
System Setup
Programme
DVD-Recorder
Parental Control
No Disc
Programme
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
MOVE
the …† buttons to select On or Off,
6 Press
then press the OK or √ button.
■
NOTE
Press the RETURN or œ button to return
to the previous menu. Press the MENU
button to exit the menu.
Password
:On
Level 8 Adults
Rating Level
:Level
Level71 Kids
Level 6
Change Password Level 5
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1 Kids
OK
RETURN
√
√
√
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Rating
3 Press
Level you want, then press the OK or √
button.
For example, if you select up to Level 6, discs that
contain Level 7, 8 will not play. A larger number
indicates that the programme is intended for adult use
only.
If you forgot your password
1 Remove the disc.
and hold down the PROG (
)
2 Press
buttons on the front panel of the DVD
Recorder simultaneously for more than 5
seconds with no disc in the DVD Recorder.
All setting including the password will revert to the
factory setting.
English -33
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 34
About the Change Password
the …† buttons to select Change
1 Press
Password.
DVD-Recorder
Parental Control
No Disc
Programme
Password
: On
√
Setup
Rating Level
: Level 1 Kids
√
Change Password
MOVE
OK
√
RETURN
EXIT
2 Press the OK or √ button.
System Setup
The 'Enter the password' message will be displayed.
DVD-Recorder
Change Password
No Disc
Programme
Setup
0~9
NUMBER
Enter the password
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the 4-digit password using the 0 to 9
3 Enter
buttons on the remote control.
The ‘Confirm the password’ message will be displayed.
Enter your password again.
DVD-Recorder
Change Password
No Disc
Programme
Setup
0~9
■
NOTE
34- English
NUMBER
Confirm the password
OK
RETURN
EXIT
See page 33 if you forgot your password.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 35
Before Recording
Recording
This DVD Recorder can record on various types of
discs. Before recording, read the following instructions
and select the disc type according to your preference.
Recordable discs
This section shows various DVD recording
methods.
This DVD Recorder can record on the following discs.
DVD-RW
●
●
DVD-R
DVD-RWs are rewritable.
DVD-Rs are non-rewritable
Compatibility between Samsung and Other
Company’s Recorder
Disc Types
Recording
format
Recording
Device
Samsung
Other Company
DVD-RW
Samsung
V Mode
Other Company
Samsung
DVD-R
V Mode
Other Company
■
Finalise
- This closes the DVD-R/-RW so no
additional recording can be done.
■
Unfinalise
- This allows additional recording on a
DVD-RW disc originally recorded on the
DVD Recorder.
- A DVD-RW disc that has been recorded
by DAO (Disc At Once) in a PC cannot
be unfinalised.
- A DVD-RW disc that has been recorded
in Video Mode of a different maker’s
recorder cannot be unfinalised.
- A DVD-R disc cannot be unfinalised.
NOTE
Before Recording ...........................................35
Recording the current TV programme
you are watching ............................................37
Recording from external equipment
you are watching ............................................39
Copying from a Camcorder ...........................40
Making a One Touch Recording (OTR)..........41
Making a Timer Recording .............................42
finalised
not finalised
finalised
not finalised
finalised
not finalised
finalised
not finalised
finalised
not finalised
finalised
not finalised
Additional Recording in
Samsung Recorder
Not recordable
Recordable
Not recordable
Recordable
Not recordable
Recordable
Not recordable
Not recordable
Not recordable
Recordable
Not recordable
Not recordable
Flexible Recording (for Timer recording only) ..43
Editing the Scheduled Record List.................43
Deleting the Scheduled Record List...............44
Recording the Standard Timer List ................45
English -35
Recording
VR Mode
Finalising
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_17~36 3/3/06 5:56 PM Page 36
Recording Formats
Since available functions differ depending on the disc
type, select a disc that best fits your preferences.
When you insert an unused disc, the following message
appears.
DVD-RW: When a blank disc is first inserted, the
message “Uninitialized Disc Do you want to
initialize this disc?” will appear.
When YES is selected, the disc will be
formatted in VR Mode.
Recording Times
Data Rates
XP
Select when the
(high quality mode) video quality is
important.
Approx. 1 hour
about 8 Mbps
SP
Select to record in
(standard quality mode) standard quality.
Approx. 2 hours
about 4 Mbps
Select when a long
LP
recording time is
(long recording mode)
required.
EP
(extended mode)
Approx. 4 hours
about 2 Mbps
Select when a longer
recording time is
required.
Approx. 6 hours/
about 1.2 Mbps
Approx. 8 hours/
about 0.8 Mbps
FR
for timer recording only Approx 60 to 480 Min
(Flexible Recording) see page 43.
Approx 0.8 to 8Mbps
Uninitialized Disc
Do you want to initialize this disc?
Yes
Characteristic
Mode
No
Unrecordable video
If you want to format in either VR Mode or
Video Mode, refer to Formatting a Disc on
pages 79~80.
DVD-Recorder
Video with copy protection cannot be recorded on this
DVD Recorder.
When the DVD Recorder receives a copy guard signal
while recording, recording stops and the following
message appears on the screen.
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Playlist
Disc Name :
√
Clock Set
√
Channal
Disc Manager
Choose
the recording format for DVD-RW
Langguage
√
Programme
√
Recording
Setup
MOVE
DVD-VR
OK
√
You cannot record copy protected movie.
DVD-V
RETURN
EXIT
DVD-R: Formatting DVD is unnecessary and only
Video Mode Recording is supported
DVD-RW(Video mode)/-R
●
●
Chapters will be created automatically when you
finalise recording on DVD-R / DVD-RW discs in Video
mode with the Chapter Creator has been set to On.
The chapter’s length (interval between chapters)
varies according to the recording mode.
Simple editing (erasing titles/changing title name)
DVD-RW(VR mode)
●
●
This mode allows multiple editing functions (such as
deletion of the whole title, partial deletion of a title, etc.)
Various editing options using a created Playlist
Recording Mode
Select one of four recording modes by pressing the
REC MODE button repeatedly while the DVD Recorder is
in Stop mode for the desired recording time and picture
quality.
In general, picture quality improves as the recording time
decreases. In FR mode, the most suitable record mode is
adjusted automatically, according to remaining time on the
disc and length of the timer recording.
This function is selected only one mode in XP, SP, LP and
EP modes. And you can use this mode for timer recording.
36- English
Concerning Copy Control Signals
TV broadcasts that contain copy control signals may
have one of the following three signal types, Copy-Free,
Copy-Once and Copy-Never. If you want to record a
copy-once type programme, use DVD-RW with CPRM
in VR Mode.
Signal type Copy-Free
Copy-Once
Copy-Never
O
-
-
VR mode
O
O*
-
Video mode
O
-
DVD-R
O
-
Media
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
with CPRM
Once “Copy Once” has been recorded, recording
cannot be done anymore.
- Content Protection for Recordable Media (CPRM)
CPRM is a mechanism that ties a recording to the
media on which it is recorded. It is supported by some
DVD recorders, but not by many DVD players. Each
blank recordable DVD has a unique 64-bit media ID
etched in the BCA. When protected content is recorded
onto the disc, it can be encrypted with a 56-bit C2
(Cryptomeria) cipher derived from the media ID.
During playback, the ID is read from the BCA and used
to generate a key to decrypt the contents of the disc.
If the contents of the disc are copied to other media, the
ID will be absent or wrong and the data will not be
decryptable.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/3/06 5:57 PM Page 37
About INFO Button
Recording the current TV
programme you are
watching
The INFO function allows you to view the current status
and progress of playback and recording. Depending on
the disc type and status, the displayed screen may be
different.
Checking the available disc
space (Disc Information)
When recording on an used disc, make sure that there
is enough disc space for recording. With DVD-RWs,
you can free up disc space by erasing titles.
●
Before you start
Check that the disc has enough available space for the
recording. Adjust the recording mode.
the OPEN/CLOSE button and place
1 Press
a recordable disc on the disc tray.
the OPEN/CLOSE button to close
2 Press
the disc tray.
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel
display.
Press the INFO button.
The display window of disc information appears.
Items in the display differ depending on the disc type
or recording format.
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Name
Disc Info
Recording
!
#
If an unused DVD-RW disc is used, whether to
initialize or not will be asked first. Make your selection,
then press the OK button. (See page 36.)
@
Disc
Uninitialized Disc
Do you want to initialize this disc?
$
%
^
&
Total Title
Total Playlist
Recordable Time
Protection
Screen
JAN 01 2006 SUN
15
1
02:12 SP
Not Protected
PR 11 [DUAL L]
Yes
No
12:00
1. Disc Type
2. Current information display status
3. Disc Name
4. Total Titles : Total number of titles
5. Total Playlist : Total number of Playlists
6. Recordable Time : The longest continuous
recording time in each of the recording
modes(approximate)
7. Date : Current date and time
3
Press the PROG ( / ) or number
( ~ ) buttons to select the current
programme you want to record.
the REC MODE button repeatedly,
(or press the REC MODE button, then
4 Press
press the …† button) to select the
recording speed(quality).
➞ SP ➞ LP ➞ EP ➞ XP
Record Mode
SP (02:12)
English -37
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/10/06 7:08 PM Page 38
5 Press the REC button.
Information concerning the channel is displayed on
the screen, then recording begins.
REC icon( ) is displayed on the front panel.
■
You can not change the recording mode
and the PROG while recording.
■
Recording will stop automatically if there
is no free space left for recording.
■
Up to 99 titles can be recorded onto a
disc.
■
Recording will stop automatically if a copy
protected image is selected.
■
DVD-RW discs must be formatted before
starting to record.
Most new discs are sold unformatted.
■
Do not use DVD-R authoring discs with
this DVD Recorder.
NOTE
Recording : PR 1 NICAM DUAL L
To view the current status of the disc and progress of
recording : Press the INFO button, the information
about the disc will appear.
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Name
Recording
Total Title
Total Playlist
Recordable Time
Protection
Screen
JAN 01 2006 SUN
Disc Info
16
1
02:12 SP
Not Protected
PR 1 [ DUAL L]
12:00
Press the INFO button once again to view
information about the recording.
DVD-RW(VR)
Name
Recording Info
JAN/01/2006 12:00 PR1
Recording Title
16
Created Time
JAN/01/2006 12:00
Recording Time 00:00:07
JAN 01 2006 SUN
12:00
To stop recording
Press the STOP button to stop a recording in progress.
● When using DVD-RW/DVD-R discs, the message
‘Updating the disc information. Please wait for a
moment.’ is displayed.
38- English
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/10/06 7:08 PM Page 39
Recording from external
equipment you are
watching
5 Press the REC button.
To pause recording
Press the PLAY/PAUSE( ) button to pause a
recording in progress.
● Press the PLAY/PAUSE(
) button again to resume
recording.
●
Before you start
Check that the disc has enough available space for the
recording. Adjust the recording mode.
1
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button, place a
recordable disc on the disc tray.
You can switch channels by pressing the PROG
buttons while recording pauses.
The front panel display changes in the following
sequence:
➞ PR Number ➞ AV1 ➞ AV2 ➞ DV
)
Press the STOP button to stop a recording in progress.
● When using DVD-RW/DVD-R discs, the message
‘Updating the disc information. Please wait for a
moment.’ is displayed.
■
You can not change the recording mode
while recording or Pause.
■
Recording will stop automatically if
there is no free space left for recording.
■
Up to 99 titles can be recorded onto a
disc.
■
Recording will stop automatically if a
copy protected image is selected.
■
DVD-RW discs must be formatted
before starting to record.
Most new discs are sold unformatted.
■
Do not use DVD-R authoring discs with
this DVD Recorder.
NOTE
If you connect a digital camcorder, press the
INPUT SEL. button to select DV.
(See page 40)
the REC MODE button repeatedly,
4 Press
(or press the REC MODE button, then
press the …† button) to select the
recording speed(quality).
➞ SP ➞ LP ➞ EP ➞ XP
Record Mode
SP (02:12)
English -39
Recording
Press the INPUT SEL. button to select the
3 input
source according to the connection
you made.
/
To stop recording
the OPEN/CLOSE button to close
2 Press
the disc tray.
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel
display.
If an unused DVD-RW disc is used, whether to
initialize or not will be asked first. (See page 36)
(
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/10/06 7:08 PM Page 40
Copying from a Camcorder
play the camcorder and find the starting
5 Topoint
to be copied, select the play icon( )
on the top of the screen using the œ √
buttons and then press the OK button.
You may control the Camcorder using the IEEE1394
(DV) interface.
start recording, select the record icon(
6 Toonbuttons
the top of the screen using the œ √
and then press the OK button.
)
You can also use the REC button on the remote
control to start recording. (If your camcorder is in stop
mode, the REC button doesn't work.)
Before you start
Check that the disc has enough available space for
the recording. Adjust the recording mode.
the OPEN/CLOSE button, place a
recordable disc on the disc tray.
1 Press
To stop recording
Press the STOP button to stop a recording in
progress.
● When using DVD-RW/DVD-R discs, the message
‘Updating the disc information. Please wait for a
moment.’ is displayed
the OPEN/CLOSE button to close
the disc tray.
2 Press
Recording
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel
display.
If an unused DVD-RW disc is used, whether to
initialize or not will be asked first. (See page 36.)
3
Press the REC MODE button repeatedly,
(or Press the REC MODE button, then
press the …† button) to select the
recording speed(quality).
➞ SP ➞ LP ➞ EP ➞ XP
Record Mode
SP (02:12)
4 Press the INPUT SEL. button to select DV.
If the input is set to DV, a playback/record menu that
enables camcorder control appears on the top of the
screen.
DV
The DV device is connected.
MOVE
40- English
OK
RETURN
■
You can not change the recording mode and
input source while recording.
■
Recording will stop automatically if there is
no free space left for recording.
■
Up to 99 titles can be recorded onto a disc.
■
Recording will stop automatically if a copy
protected image is selected.
■
DVD-RW discs must be formatted before
starting to record. Most new discs are sold
unformatted.
■
Do not use DVD-R authoring discs with this
DVD Recorder.
■
If you connect a camcorder using DV Jack,
the related control menu appears
automatically. To access on the screen
controls during recording, press the œ or √
button.
NOTE
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/3/06 5:57 PM Page 41
Making a One Touch
Recording (OTR)
To view the current status of the disc and progress
of recording : Press the INFO button, and
information about the disc will appear.
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Name
You can set the DVD Recorder to record in preset
increments by pressing the REC button repeatedly.
you want to record a TV channel, press
1 Ifthe
PROG ( / ) or number buttons to
select a desired channel.
If you want to record through a connected
external component, press the INPUT SEL.
button to select an appropriate external
input (AV 1, AV 2 or DV).
●
Total Title
16
Total Playlist 1
Recordable Time 02:12 SP
Protection
Not Protected
Screen
PR 1 [ DUAL L]
JAN 01 2006 SUN
12:00
Press the INFO button once again.
Then you can check the information about the title
being recorded.
DVD-RW(VR)
Name
Recording Info
JAN/01/2006 12:00 PR1
TV PROGRAMME: 1 to 99
2 Press the REC button to start recording.
the REC button repeatedly to adjust
the desired recording time.
3 Press
■
The timer counter decreases by the
minute from 9:00 to 0:00, then the DVD
Recorder stops recording and is
powered off.
Recording Title 16
Created Time
JAN/01/2006 12:00
Recording Time 00:00:07
JAN 01 2006 SUN
12:00
To stop recording
Press the STOP button. The message “Press STOP
button once more to cancel Timer Record.” is displayed.
Press STOP button once more
to cancel Timer Record.
Press the STOP button once more to stop recording.
English -41
Recording
➞ 0:30 ➞ 1:00 ➞ ... 4:00 ➞ 5:00➞... 9:00 ➞normal
NOTE
Disc Info
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/3/06 5:57 PM Page 42
Making a Timer Recording
3 Set timer recording option.
• Fill the input items using the arrow buttons and
number buttons.
œ √ : Moves to the previous/next item,
…†, 0~9 : Sets a value.
• Source : The video input source (AV1 or AV2), or
the broadcasting channel you want to
make a timer recording from.
Before you start
• Day : Timer Recording allows setting the
recording time within one month period.
Set the recording day.
1. Check the antenna cable is connected.
2. Check the remaining time of the disc.
3. Check the date and time are correct.
Make sure the Clock (Setup-Clock Set) must be set
before you proceed with a timer recording.
(See page 24)
1
Scheduled Record List
√
Playlist
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
Recording
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Using the MENU button.
●
●
31 TUE
W-SU
• Speed (Recording Mode) :
- FR (Flexible Recording) : Select when you want to
set video quality automatically.
In FR mode, the most suitable record mode is
adjusted automatically, according to remaining
time on the disc and length of the timer recording.
This function is selected only one mode in XP, SP,
LP and EP modes. And you can use this mode for
timer recording.
- XP (high quality) : Select when video quality is
important. (Approx. 1 hour)
- SP (standard quality) : Select to record in standard
quality. (Approx. 2 hours)
- LP (low quality) : Select when a long recording
time is required.(Approx. 4 hours)
- EP (extended) : Select when a longer recording
time is required. (Approx.6 hours or 8 hours)
Programme
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Daily
MO-SA
MO-FR
W-SA
• Start/End Time : Start and end time of the timer
recording.
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the TIMER button.
DVD-Recorder
01 SUN
02 MON
03 TUE
04 WED
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode, press the
MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Programme, then
press the OK or √ button.
2 Press the OK or √ button twice.
• The Timer Recording screen is displayed.
Current Time 12:05
DVD-RW(VR)
No. Source
Day
Start End Speed
Edit
No. 01
Source
Day
Start
End
Speed
PR 01
01 SUN
12:05
14:05
SP
Available Time 00:48 SP
MOVE
42- English
■
Scheduled Record List
DVD-Recorder
OK
RETURN
EXIT
NOTE
When you are recording at EP mode on a
DVD-RW(V)/-R disc, it may not record the
full 6 or 8 hours because the DVD
Recorder uses the VBR(Variable Bit Rate)
ENCODING system. For example, if you
record a programme with a lot of action, it
uses a higher bit rate which in turn
consumes more disc memory.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/16/06 4:16 PM Page 43
4
Press the OK button.
If the timer settings overlap
The programmes are recorded in order of priority.
If timer recording is set for the first programme
and then again for the second programme and
both programmes overlap, the following message
will appear on the screen: “This setting is identical
with 1”The message shows that the first
programme has priority. After recording of the first
programme is complete, the second programme
starts being recorded.
To exit without saving the current setting
Press the MENU button.
To return to the previous menu
Press the RETURN button if you don’t want to set
a timer recording.
Editing the Scheduled
Record List
Follow these directions to edit the timer record list.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the TIMER button.
DVD-Recorder
the power off to finish the Timer
5 Turn
Recording setting. Timer Recording will
not work when the power is on.
●
●
Programme
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Scheduled Record List
√
Playlist
Disc Manager
Programme
will appear on the front panel. It means that a
timer recording is registered.
will blink if disc is not inserted.
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Using the MENU button.
●
■
NOTE
You can make the Timer Recording up to
12 programmes.
●
2 Press the OK or √ button.
the …† buttons to select the number
3 Press
of the timer recording you want to edit, then
press the OK or √ button.
●
The Edit and Delete items are displayed.
Scheduled Record List
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
No. Source
Flexible Recording
(for Timer recording only)
Recording
■
The timer recording time may differ from
the set time depending on disc status
and overall timer recording status (for
example, recording times overlapping, or
when the previous recording ends within
2 minutes before the start time of the next
recording.)
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode mode, press
the MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Programme, then
press the OK or √ button.
01
02
PR 01
PR 01
Current Time 12:27
Day
Start
End
Speed
01 SUN
02 MON
13:07
12:08
14:07
14:08
SP
SP
:
:
--
03
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Edit
Edit√
Delete
√
√
EXIT
In FR mode, the most suitable record mode is adjusted
automatically, according to remaining time on the disc and
length of the timer recording. This function is selected only
one mode in XP, SP, LP and EP modes. And you can use
this mode for timer recording.
The FR mode recording setup is the same as Timer
Recording. When setting the mode in step 3, set FR
Mode. (See page 42)
English -43
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/3/06 5:57 PM Page 44
the …† buttons to select Edit, then
4 Press
press the OK or √ button.
●
The Timer Record Input item is displayed.
Edit the items you want to modify.
See the “Making a Timer Recording” section for
more information on Timer Recording Input items.
the …† buttons to select the number
3 Press
of the timer recording you want to delete,
then press the OK or √ button.
●
The Edit and Delete items are displayed.
Scheduled Record List
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
No. Source
Scheduled Record List
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
No. Source
01
Current Time 12:27
Day
Start
End
02
03
Speed Edit
PR 01
PR 01
Current Time 12:27
Day
Start
End
Speed
Edit
01 SUN
13:07
14:07
SP
Edit√
02 MON
12:08
:
14:08
:
SP
--
Delete
√
√
No. 01
Source
Day
Start
End
Speed
PR 01
01 SUN
13:07
14:07
SP
MOVE
Available Time
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
00:48 SP
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Delete,
4 then
press the OK or √ button.
5
Press the OK button to confirm the
edited setting.
6
Press the MENU button after finishing the
operation. The menu screen will disappear.
●
You will be prompted with the delete confirm
message such as ‘Do you want to delete
No.01?’.
Scheduled Record List
DVD-Recorder
Current Time 12:27
DVD-RW(VR)
No. Source
Speed
Edit
SP
√
02 MON 12:08 14:08
SP
Do you /want to/ delete ‘No.01’
?:
:
√
01
PR 01
02
03
PR 01
Day
Recording
Deleting the Scheduled
Record List
End
01 SUN No.
13:0701 14:07
Yes
MOVE
Start
OK
√
No
RETURN
EXIT
Press the œ √ buttons to select Yes, then
5 press
the OK button.
●
The selected entry will be deleted from the list.
the MENU button after finishing the
6 Press
operation. The menu screen will disappear.
Follow these directions to delete an entry from the timer
record list.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the TIMER button.
1 With
Using the MENU button.
●
●
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode mode, press
the MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Programme, then
press the OK or √ button.
2 Press the OK or √ button.
44- English
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_37~45 3/3/06 5:57 PM Page 45
Recording the Standard
Timer List
When the start time in the Scheduled record list
reaches while the set is in power off, the set will be
powered on and start the recording automatically.
To stop Recording
Press the STOP button. The message “Press STOP
button once more to cancel Timer Record.” is displayed.
Press STOP button once more
to cancel Timer Record.
Press the STOP button once more to stop recording
■
If there is not enough disc space or a
copy prevention signal is received during
recording, recording will stop.
Recording
NOTE
You cannot record copy protected movie.
■
If there is no free disc space or the disc is
not recordable, recording will not operate.
(You can record after replacing the disc.)
English -45
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:16 PM Page 46
Before Playing
Playback
Read the following information before playing a disc.
Region code (DVD-Video only)
Both the DVD recorder and the discs are
coded by region. These regional codes must
match in order for the disc to play. If the codes
do not match, the disc will not play.
The Region Number for this DVD Recorder is
described on the rear panel of the DVD Recorder.
This section introduces basic functions of playback
and playback by disc type.
Disc types that can be played
Disc Types
Disc Logo Recorded content
Disc Shape Max. Playing Time
Single sided(12cm)
240 min
Double sided(12cm)
480 min
AUDIO + VIDEO
Single sided(8cm)
80 min
Double sided(8cm)
160 min
Single sided(12cm)
74 min
AUDIO
Single sided(8cm)
20 min
1hr (XP: Excellent Quality)
2hr (SP: Standard Quality)
AUDIO + VIDEO 12cm (4.7GB)
4hr (LP: Long Playback)
6hr or 8hr (EP:Extended)
1hr (XP: Excellent Quality)
2hr (SP: Standard Quality)
AUDIO + VIDEO 12cm (4.7GB)
4hr (LP: Long Playback)
6hr or 8hr (EP:Extended)
DVD-VIDEO
AUDIO-CD
DVD-RW
DVD-R
JPEG
MP3
MPEG4
Playback
CD-R/-RW
DVD-R/-RW
D I G I TA L
DIGITAL OUT
Dolby Digital
DTS
-
Digital Audio
■
NOTE
Stereo
-
Depending on the disc type, it may take
up to one minute to load.
PAL broadcast
system in U.K,
France, Germany, etc.
Discs that cannot be played
DivX
MP3
●
●
●
Before Playing...................................................46
Playing a Disc ...................................................47
Playing an Audio CD/MP3 ..............................56
Playing a Picture CD ........................................60
Playing a MPEG4.............................................61
Playing the Title List..........................................62
46- English
●
●
●
DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or
“ALL”
3.9 GB DVD-R Disc for Authoring.
DVD-RW(VR mode) not recorded following the Video
Recording Standard
Unfinalised DVD-R,unfinalised DVD-RW(V mode)
recorded on other equipment.
DVD-ROM/PD/ MV-Disc, etc
Video CD/SVCD/CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/CD-G/CD-I
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:16 PM Page 47
■
NOTE
■
■
Playback and/or recording may not work
for some types of discs, or when specific
operations, such as angle change and
aspect ratio adjustment, are being
performed. Information about the discs is
written in detail on the box. Please refer
to this if necessary.
Do not allow the disc to become dirty or
scratched. Fingerprints, dirt, dust,
scratches or deposits of cigarette smoke
on the recording surface may make it
impossible to use the disc for recording.
DVD-RW/-R discs may not be able to play
on some DVD Recorders, depending on
the player, disc and the condition of the
recording.
1 Press the OPEN/CLOSE button.
a disc gently into the tray with the
2 Place
disc’s label facing up.
the OPEN/CLOSE button to close
3 Press
the disc tray.
Your DVD Recorder closes the disc tray and plays
the disc automatically.
● The DVD Recorder does not play discs
automatically after the initial power on.
● When the DVD Recorder is powered on and a disc
is in the tray, the DVD Recorder will be activated
and wait in stop status.
● Press the PLAY button to start playback.
● If you want the DVD Recorder to play automatically
when it is powered off with a disc in the DVD
Recorder, power on with the PLAY button.
●
Playing a Disc
4 Press the STOP button to stop playback.
When you stop playing disc, the DVD
Recorder remembers where you stopped.
When you press the PLAY button again, it
will pick up where you left off. (unless the
disc is removed or the DVD Recorder is
unplugged, or if you press the STOP
button twice.)
This function is only applicable to
DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW, DVD-R or audio
CDs (CD-DA).
■
Do not move your DVD Recorder while
playing, as this may cause damage to the
disc.
■
Make sure to press the OPEN/CLOSE
button to open or close the disc tray.
■
Do not push the disc tray while it is being
opened or closed, as this may cause a
malfunction of the DVD Recorder.
■
Do not place foreign materials on or in the
disc tray.
■
Some functions may perform differently or
be disabled depending on the disc type.
If this occurs, refer to the instructions
written on the disc case.
■
Be especially careful that children's
fingers are not caught between the disc
tray and the tray chassis when it closes.
■
You must only insert one DVD disc at a
time. Inserting two or more discs will not
allow playback and may cause damage to
the DVD Recorder.
CAUTION
English -47
Playback
■
NOTE
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:16 PM Page 48
Using the Search Functions
Using the Disc Menu & Title Menu
Some discs contain a dedicated menu system that
allow you to select special functions for the title, such
as chapters, audio tracks, subtitles, film previews,
information on characters, etc.
For DVD-VIDEO discs
the DISC MENU button to enter the
1 Press
disc menu of the disc.
Move to the setup menu related to the playback
operation.
● You can select the audio languages and the
subtitles provided by the disc.
●
Press the TITLE MENU button to move to
2 the
title menu of the disc.
●
Use this button if the disc contains more than one
title. Some type of discs may not support the title
menu function.
For DVD-RW/-R discs
Searching through a Chapter or Track
playback, press the SEARCH(
1 During
button on the remote control.
DVD-VIDEO/
DVD-RW/DVD-R
MPEG4
AUDIO CD(CDDA)
the TITLE LIST button to move to the
1 Press
Title List.
■
Playback
NOTE
■
48- English
Title List: Title List shows a list to help
you select a title. Since the title
list consists of the information
on video that is actually
recorded, if one title is deleted,
that title cannot be played
again.
Playlist: This refers to a unit of playback,
which is made by selecting a
desired scene in the entire Title
List. When one playlist is
played, only the scene selected
by the user will play and then
stop. Since only the information
necessary for playing a desired
scene is included in a playlist,
even if that playlist is deleted,
the original recording will not
be deleted. (only VR mode)
Fast 1 ➞
Fast 3 ➞
Fast 5 ➞
Fast 1
Fast 1 ➞
X2➞
X2
Fast 2 ➞
Fast 4 ➞
Fast 6 ➞
Fast 2
X4➞
Fast 3
X8➞
●
You can scan the programme in reverse.
To return to normal speed playback, press the PLAY
button.
●
When you press and hold the SEARCH(
)
button, playback is done at the default speed of
Fast 2. If you release the SEARCH(
) button,
playback is performed at a normal speed.
●
The speed marked in this function may be different
from the actual playback speed.
■
No sound is heard during Scan(Search)
mode except Fast 1 mode.
■
You cannot also hear during scanning
MPEG4 in all mode.
■
For CD(CD-DA), you can hear sound
during Scan mode.
NOTE
)
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 49
About ANYKEY
Skipping Chapters or Tracks
●
During playback, you can search quickly
through a chapter or track.
playback, press the SKIP (
1 During
button on the remote control.
●
If you press the SKIP (
)
) button,
it moves to the beginning of the chapter or track or
marker(DVD-RW(VR mode)).
Pressing the button once again within 3 seconds
returns to the beginning of the previous chapter or
track or marker(DVD-RW(VR mode)).
●
If you press the SKIP (
The ANYKEY function allows you to easily search for a
desired scene by accessing title, chapter, track, time.
You can also change the subtitle and audio settings and
set some features including Repeat, Angle, Zoom.
) button,
it moves to the next chapter or track or marker
(DVD-RW(VR mode)).
Moving to a scene directly using the ANYKEY
●
Slow Motion Play
1
●
In pause mode, press the SEARCH (
button on the remote control.
If you press the SEARCH(
Slow 1 ➞
Slow 2 ➞
)
If you want to move to a title, a chapter
or a track to find a desired scene.
Press the ANYKEY button during
1 playback.
) button,
Slow 3
DVD-VIDEO
Audio
1/2
1/28
00:00:01
Off
ENG D 5.1CH
Repeat
Off
Angle
1/3
Zoom
Off
Title
Chapter
●
If you press the SEARCH(
Slow 1 ➞
●
Slow 2 ➞
) button,
Slow 3
To return to normal speed playback,
press the PLAY button.
■
NOTE
■
The speed marked in this function may be
different from the actual playback speed.
Slow motion operates only in the forward
direction on MPEG 4 discs.
Subtitle
MOVE
Press the …† buttons to select Title or
2 Chapter.
DVD-VIDEO
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
ENG
Audio
Step Motion Play
Angle
Off
1/3
Zoom
Off
Repeat
MOVE
1
Press the STEP(
) button on the
remote control during playback or pause.
●
Each time the button is pressed, a new frame will appear.
When STEP(
) is pressed, the previous frame will
be activated.
When STEP(
) is pressed, the next frame will be
activated.
●
To return to normal speed playback, press the PLAY button.
■
NOTE
CHANGE
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
the œ √ or number (0~9) buttons to
select the desired scene.
3 Press
Press the OK button.
Step motion operates only in the forward
direction on MPEG 4 discs.
English -49
Playback
Press and hold the SEARCH (
) button during
pause, the disc will play slowly at a Slow 1 speed. If the
button is released, the pause operation will resume.
Time
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 50
●
If you want to move to a desired time to
help you find a scene.
Using the Repeat Function
Press the ANYKEY button during
1 playback.
DVD-VIDEO
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Audio
Off
ENG
Repeat
Off
Angle
1/3
Zoom
Off
MOVE
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
2 Press the …† buttons to select Time.
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
ENG
Audio
Angle
Off
1/3
Zoom
Off
Repeat
MOVE
0~9
Using the REPEAT button
1 Press the REPEAT button during playback.
DVD-VIDEO
Title
Playing Repeatedly(Repeat Playback)
D 5.1CH
Repeat
Off
NUMBER
the time in the sequence of hours,
3 Enter
minutes, seconds using the number
buttons, then press the OK button.
■
Playback
NOTE
This may not work for some discs.
When an audio CD(CD-DA) or an MP3
disc is inserted, according to a disc type,
the information display may not be
appear.
■
The Time Search function does not
operate in some discs.
■
To make the screen disappear, press the
ANYKEY again
the REPEAT or …† buttons to select
2 Press
Title or Chapter you want to play repeatedly.
Press the OK button.
Repeat
Title
Title : Repeats the title that is playing.
Chapter : Repeats the chapter that is playing.
- To return to normal playback -
the REPEAT button to select Off,
then press the …† or REPEAT button and
3 Press
press OK button.
Press the CANCEL button to return to normal
playback.
50- English
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 51
Playing a Certain section Repeatedly(A-B Repeat Playback)
Using the ANYKEY button
Press the ANYKEY button during
1 playback.
Using the ANYKEY button
DVD-VIDEO
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Audio
Off
ENG
Repeat
Off
Angle
1/3
Zoom
Off
MOVE
D 5.1CH
Press the ANYKEY button during
1 playback.
CHANGE
DVD-VIDEO
2
Press the …† buttons to select Repeat,
then press the œ √ buttons to select Title or
Chapter you want to play repeatedly.
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
ENG
Audio
Angle
Off
1/3
Zoom
Off
Repeat
MOVE
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
DVD-VIDEO
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
Audio
ENG
Repeat
Angle
Title
1/3
Zoom
Off
MOVE
D 5.1CH
the …† buttons to select Repeat, then
2 Press
press the √ button to select A-B.
OK
DVD-VIDEO
3
Press the OK button.
DVD-RW(VR mode), unfinalised DVD-R
and unfinalised DVD-RW (Video mode)
do not repeat a chapter.
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
ENG
Angle
A-B
1/3
Zoom
Off
Repeat
MOVE
D 5.1CH
OK
3 Press the OK button.
the OK button at the point where you
4 Press
want the repeat play to start (A), then press
it again at the point where you want the
repeat play to stop (B).
Repeat playback of the A-B section starts.
- To return to normal playback -
5
Select Off on the Repeat item or press the
CANCEL button.
■
If you set point (B) before five seconds
has lapsed, the prohibition mark ( ) will
appear.
■
Audio CDs(CDDA) and MP3 discs do not
support the Repeat A-B function.
NOTE
English -51
Playback
NOTE
1/2
Chapter
Audio
To make the screen disappear, press the ANYKEY or
RETURN button. Repeat play allows you to repeat a
title or chapter.
■
Title
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/10/06 7:09 PM Page 52
Selecting the Subtitle
Subtitle languages may not work depending on the disc
type. This is only available during playback.
Selecting the Audio language
Audio languages may not work depending on the disc
type. This is only available during playback.
Using the SUBTITLE button
the SUBTITLE button during
1 Press
playback.
Subtitle
Using the AUDIO button
1 Press the AUDIO button during playback.
Audio
Off
the SUBTITLE or …† buttons to
2 Press
select the desired subtitle language.
To make the screen disappear, press the CANCEL or
RETURN button.
ENG Dolby Digital 5.1CH
Press the AUDIO or …† buttons to select
desired audio language.
2 the
Using the ANYKEY button
Using the ANYKEY button
1
Press the ANYKEY button during
playback.
Press the ANYKEY button during
1 playback.
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-VIDEO
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
ENG
Playback
Audio
Angle
Off
1/3
Zoom
Off
Repeat
MOVE
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
ENG
Audio
D 5.1CH
Angle
Off
1/3
Zoom
Off
Repeat
MOVE
CHANGE
Press the …† buttons to select Subtitle,
2 then
press the œ √ buttons to select the
desired subtitle language.
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
Press the …† buttons to select Audio, then
2 press
the œ √ buttons to select the desired
audio language.
DVD-VIDEO
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
ENG
ENG
Audio
Repeat
Angle
Zoom
MOVE
DVD-VIDEO
D 5.1CH
Off
1/3
Off
CHANGE
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
Audio
ENG
Repeat
Off
Angle
1/3
Zoom
Off
MOVE
■
The subtitle display may be different
depending on the disc type.
■
If the subtitles overlap, disable the caption
function on your TV.
NOTE
■
52- English
Some discs allow you to select the
language for the disc menu only.
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
■
Audio languages may be different
depending on the disc type.
■
Some discs allow you to select the audio
language for the disc menu only.
NOTE
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 53
Changing the Camera Angle
When a DVD-VIDEO contains multiple angles of a
particular scene, you can select the Angle function.
This is only available during playback.
If the disc contains multiple angles, the ANGLE mark
appears on the screen.
Zooming-In
the ANYKEY button during playback
1 orPress
pause.
DVD-VIDEO
1
Press the ANYKEY button during playback.
DVD-VIDEO
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
Audio
ENG
Repeat
Off
Angle
1/3
Zoom
Off
MOVE
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
Audio
ENG
Repeat
Angle
Off
1/3
Zoom
Off
MOVE
Title
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
the …† buttons to select Zoom, then
2 Press
press the OK button. ( ) will be displayed.
Press the …† buttons to select Angle, then
2 the
press the œ √ or number buttons to select
desired angle.
DVD-VIDEO
Title
1/2
Chapter
1/28
Time
00:00:01
Subtitle
Off
ENG
Audio
Angle
Off
1/3
Zoom
Off
Repeat
MOVE
D 5.1CH
CHANGE
This function is disc-dependent, may not
work on all DVDs.
■
This function does not work when a DVD
has not been recorded with a multicamera angle system.
NOTE
the OK button. The screen will be
enlarged to twice the normal size.
4 Press
If you press the OK button again after the screen was
enlarged to twice the normal size, the screen size will
be enlarged to four times the normal size.
normal size ➞ 2X ➞ 4X ➞ 2X ➞ normal size
■
NOTE
You can also select Zoom function directly
using ZOOM button on the remote
control.
English -53
Playback
■
Press the …† œ √ buttons to move to the
3 area
you want to enlarge.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 54
Using Bookmarks
Playing back a bookmark
This feature lets you bookmark sections of a DVD-VIDEO
or DVD-R/-RW(V mode), so you can quickly find them.
(V mode)
the MARKER button during
1 Press
playback.
the MARKER button during
1 Press
playback.
the œ √ buttons to select a
bookmarked scene.
2 Press
Bookmark
Bookmark
MOVE
MOVE
2
1 2 - - - - - - - --
- - - - - - - - - --
OK
PLAY
CLEAR
RETURN
RETURN
Press the OK button when the desired
scene appears.
the OK or PLAY button to start
3 Press
playing from the selected scene.
The number 1 is displayed and the scene is
memorized.
Clearing a bookmark
Bookmark
1 - - - - - - - - --
the MARKER button during
1 Press
playback.
Playback
MOVE
PLAY
CLEAR
RETURN
the œ √ button to move to the next
3 Press
position.
the OK button when the desired
4 Press
scene appears.
The number 2 is displayed and the scene is
memorized.
Bookmark
1 2 - - - - - - - --
the œ √ buttons to select a
2 Press
bookmarked scene.
Bookmark
MOVE
●
●
PLAY
CLEAR
■
54- English
CLEAR
RETURN
1 - - - - - - - - --
RETURN
Repeat above to bookmark other positions.
You can bookmark up to 10 scenes.
NOTE
PLAY
the CANCEL button to delete the
3 Press
selected bookmark.
Bookmark
MOVE
1 2 - - - - - - - --
When the disc tray is opened and then
closed, bookmarks will disappear.
MOVE
OK
RETURN
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 55
Using Markers
Playing back a Marker
(VR mode)
Press the MARKER button during
1 playback.
Marker
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
OK
2
the œ √ buttons to select a
bookmarked scene.
2 Press
N:0
Marker
RETURN
Press the OK button when the desired
scene appears.
The number 01 is displayed and the scene is
memorized.
Marker
Press the MARKER button during
1 playback.
01 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
N:1
MOVE
01 02 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
PLAY
CLEAR
N:2
RETURN
the OK or PLAY button to start
3 Press
playing from the selected scene.
●
●
If you press the SKIP( ) button, it moves to the
beginning of the marker. Pressing the button once
again within 3 seconds returns to the beginning of the
previous marker.
If you press the SKIP( ) button, it moves to the next
marker.
Clearing a Marker
MOVE
PLAY
CLEAR
RETURN
4
Press the OK button when the desired
scene appears.
the œ √ buttons to select a
2 Press
bookmarked scene.
Press the CANCEL button to delete the
selected bookmark.
The number 02 is displayed and the scene is
memorized.
Marker
MOVE
●
Press the MARKER button during
1 playback.
01 02 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
PLAY
CLEAR
Marker
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
N : 10
Marker
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 --
N:9
N:2
RETURN
DVD-RW (VR Mode) discs have the Marker function
instead of the Bookmark function. The Marker
function allows you to mark up to 99 scenes. Since
the scenes may be displayed as many different
pages, numbering is necessary. If a disc in use is
encoded with Disc Protection, Markers cannot be set
or deleted. Only playback is available.
MOVE
■
PLAY
CLEAR
RETURN
When a marker is cleared while DVD-RW (VR mode)
is playing, marker numbers will change.
For example, if the 7th marker is cleared after ten
markers are registered, the marker numbers after
the eighth will automatically move ahead by one and
the 8th marker becomes the 7th.
English -55
Playback
3
Press the œ √ button to move to the next
position.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 56
Playing an Audio CD/MP3
Buttons on the Remote Control used for Audio CD(CD-DA) playback
Playing an Audio CD (CD-DA)/MP3
Each disc has a variety of menu functions available.
Playing an Audio CD(CD-DA)
an audio CD (CD-DA) into the disc
1 Insert
tray.
The audio CD menu appears and the tracks (songs)
are played automatically.
CD
√ 0:00:01
TRACK 1
CDDA
PLAY MODE
Title
Length
002
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
0:03:50
0:04:00
003
004
005
006
007
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
^
*
MOVE
OK
RETURN
!
@
EXIT
!
Audio CD(CD-DA) Screen Elements
Playback
^
&
01/15
No.
the …† buttons to select the track
you want to hear, then press the OK or √
2 Press
button.
!
CD
Music List
01/15
TRACK 1
$
√ 0:00:01
TRACK 1
CDDA
PLAY MODE
No.
Title
Length
002
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
0:03:50
0:04:00
003
004
005
006
007
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
#
%
^
1. Play mode icon
2. Current track(song)
3. Displays the current play index and total track
number.
4. This shows the operating state of a disc and a
playback time corresponding to a portion that is
currently played.
5. Displays the track list(song list) and the playing time
of each track.
6. Button display.
56- English
$
Music List
TRACK 1
@
%
#
(
1. …† : Selects a track (song).
2. √ : Plays the selected track (song).
3. OK button: Plays the selected track (song).
4. SKIP ( ) button: Plays the next track.
5. SKIP ( ) button: Returns to the beginning of the
current track when pressed during playback. If
pressed again, your DVD recorder moves to and
plays the previous track.
If you press the this button within three seconds after
playback starts, the previous track will be played.
If you press the this button after three seconds, the
current track will be replayed from the beginning.
6. Press the SEARCH ( / ) button: Fast Play (X2,
X4, X8)
7. STOP button: Stops a track(song).
8. PLAY/PAUSE button: Plays a track(song) or pauses
playback.
9. ANYKEY button: To select the sub menu on screen
display (Repeat or Play Option).
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/16/06 4:31 PM Page 57
Playing an MP3 Disc
MP3 Screen Elements
!
1
Insert an MP3 Disc into the disc tray.
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
Disc Navigation
√
MOVE
$
Title
√ 0:00:15
002
ROOT
SONG01
SONG02
SONG01
4.0MB
01/26/2006
003
004
005
006
SONG03
SONG04
SONG05
SONG06
PLAY MODE
MOVE
%
√
√
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
Disc Navigation
DivX
OK
RETURN
EXIT
^
1. Play mode icon
2. Current track(song)
3. Displays the current track(song) information.
4. This shows the operating state of a disc and a
playback time corresponding to a portion that is
currently played.
5. Displays the information for the folder and its tracks.
6. Button display.
√
Programme Photo
√
Music
√
MOVE
01/13
No.
MP3
Press the …† buttons to select the Disc
2 Navigation,
and then press the OK or √
button.
Setup
Music List
SONG01
#
DivX
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
CD
Disc
Navigation
@
MP3
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select the Music,
3 and
then press the OK or √ button.
MP3
Music List
SONG01
01/13
No.
Title
002
ROOT
SONG01
SONG02
SONG01
4.0MB
01/26/2006
003
004
005
006
SONG03
SONG04
SONG05
SONG06
PLAY MODE
MOVE
MP3
OK
RETURN
Playback
√ 0:00:15
EXIT
The MP3 menu appears and the tracks(songs) are
played automatically.
the …† buttons to select the track
(song) you want to hear, then press the OK
4 Press
or √ button.
English -57
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 58
Buttons on the Remote Control used for MP3 playback
Playing Repeatedly(Repeat Playback)
Using the REPEAT button
1
^
Press the REPEAT button during playback.
The Track repeat mode icon ( ) appears and the
selected track is played repeatedly.
CD
%
Music List
TRACK 1
01/15
No.
&
√ 0:00:07
*
TRACK 1
CDDA
PLAY MODE
!
Length
002
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
0:03:50
0:04:00
003
004
005
006
007
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
MOVE
OK
RETURN
2
Press the REPEAT button once more to
play the disc repeatedly.
The Disc repeat mode icon ( ) appears and the
inserted disc is played repeatedly.
For MP3 disc, the Folder repeat mode icon( )
appears and all tracks in the current folder are played
repeatedly.
Pressing the REPEAT button once more changes the
mode to the Disc repeat mode.
#
(
Playback
CD
1. …† : Selects a track (song).
2. √ : Plays the selected track (song).
3. OK button: Plays back the selected track (song) or
displays the files in the selected folder.
4. RETURN button: Moves to the folder to which the
current song belongs.
5. SKIP ( ) button: Plays the next track.
6. SKIP ( ) button: Returns to the beginning of the
current track when pressed while playing. If pressed
again, your DVD recorder moves to and plays the
previous track.
If you press the this button within three seconds, the
previous track will be played.
If you press the this button after three seconds, the
current track will be replayed from the beginning.
7. STOP button: Stops a track(song).
8. PLAY/PAUSE button: Plays a track(song) or pauses
playback.
9. ANYKEY button: To select the sub menu on screen
display (Repeat or Play Option).
58- English
EXIT
$
@
!
Title
Music List
TRACK 1
01/15
No.
√ 0:00:07
TRACK 1
CDDA
PLAY MODE
Title
Length
002
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
0:03:50
0:04:00
003
004
005
006
007
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
To return to normal playback
3
Press the REPEAT button repeatedly until
the repeat mode icon disappears, or press
the CANCEL button.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 59
Play Option Mode
Using the ANYKEY button
1
Press the ANYKEY button during playback.
The PLAY MODE window appears.
CD
The Play Option can be used with an audio CD or MP3
in the Stop mode.
Music List
TRACK 1
01/15
No.
√ 0:00:07
TRACK 1
CDDA
PLAY MODE
Title
Length
TRACK 1
PLAY MODE
002
TRACK 2
Repeat
003 : Off
TRACK 3
Play
: Normal
004optionTRACK
4
005
TRACK 5
006
TRACK 6
007
TRACK 7
MOVE
OK
0:03:50
0:04:00
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
RETURN
1 Press the ANYKEY button in Stop mode.
The PLAY MODE window appears.
CD
EXIT
Music List
TRACK 1
01/15
No.
2
Select the desired repeat mode (Track or
Disc) using the œ √ buttons, and then
press the OK button.
0:00:20
TRACK 1
CDDA
PLAY MODE
For MP3 discs, you can select Track, Folder or Disc.
To return to normal playback
3
Select Off in PLAY MODE window using
the œ √ buttons, and then press the OK
button.
Title
Length
TRACK 1
PLAY MODE
002
TRACK 2
Repeat : Off
003
TRACK 3
Play 004
option : TRACK
Normal4
005
TRACK 5
006
TRACK 6
007
TRACK 7
MOVE
OK
0:03:50
0:04:00
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
RETURN
EXIT
Press the œ √ buttons to select the desired
2 item
(Normal, Random, Intro or Playlist)
in the Play option, then press the OK
button.
●
●
●
●
English -59
Playback
Normal: Tracks on a disc are played in the order in
which they were recorded on the disc.
Intro: The first 10 seconds of each track will be
played. If you want to listen to the music that you
have selected, press the OK or PLAY button.
The play option will be changed to Normal Play.
When Intro Play is completed, Normal Play is
performed.
Playlist: The Playlist playback option allows you to
select the order in which you want tracks to play.
Random: The Random option plays a disc’s tracks in
random order. After a random list is generated and
played completely, another random list is generated
and played. Random Play is continued until the play
option is changed.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 60
To Programme Tracks
Playing a Picture
You can register a maximum of 30 tracks in the playlist.
Press the ANYKEY button in the Stop
1 mode.
The PLAY MODE window appears.
CD
Music List
TRACK 1
01/15
No.
0:00:20
TRACK 1
CDDA
PLAY MODE
Title
Length
001 MODE
TRACK 1
PLAY
002
TRACK 2
Repeat : Off
003
TRACK 3
Play 004
option : TRACK
Normal4
005
TRACK 5
006
TRACK 6
007
TRACK 7
MOVE
OK
1 Insert a JPEG into the disc tray.
DVD-Recorder
0:03:50
CD
Disc
Navigation
0:04:00
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
RETURN
Disc Navigation
DivX
√
√
EXIT
MOVE
Press the œ √ buttons to select Playlist in the
2 Play
option.
3 Press the OK button.
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select the Disc
2 Navigation,
and then press the OK or √
button.
The Playlist screen will appear.
Press the …† buttons to select Tracks in the order in
which you want them to play. Press the OK button to
add the selected track to the Playlist.
CD
√
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
Disc Navigation
DivX
√
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
√
√
Playlist
06/15
CDDA
TRACK 1
001
TRACK 1
CDDA
TRACK 2
002
TRACK 3
CDDA
TRACK 3
003
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 4
004
TRACK 6
CDDA
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 6
CDDA
TRACK 7
CDDA
TRACK 8
Playback
PLAY MODE
4
MOVE
MOVE
OK
EXIT
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select the Photo,
3 and
then press the OK or √ button.
JPEG
If you playlisted a wrong track, press the √
button, then press the …† buttons to select
the wrong track, then press the CANCEL
button.
Photo List
JPEG01
01/10
ROOT
JPEG01
JPEG02
JPEG03
JPEG04
JPEG05
JPEG06
JPEG07
Slide Show
MOVE
The wrong track will be removed.
CD
Playlist
OK
RETURN
EXIT
03/03
CDDA
TRACK 1
001
TRACK 1
CDDA
TRACK 2
002
TRACK 3
CDDA
TRACK 3
003
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 4
CDDA
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 6
CDDA
TRACK 7
CDDA
TRACK 8
PLAY MODE
5
the …† œ √ buttons to select a
4 Press
picture.
MOVE
OK
CLEAR
EXIT
Press the PLAY button to playback the
playlist.
60- English
To see the next 8 pictures, press the SKIP( )
button.
● To see the previous 8 pictures, press the SKIP(
button.
●
)
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 61
If you press the PLAY button, the Slide
5-1 Show
Speed screen will appear.
Press the œ √ buttons to set the slide show speed,
then press the OK button.
MPEG4 File is used to contain the audio and video
data.
MPEG4 File with following extensions can be played.
- .AVI, .DIVX, .avi, .divx
Slide Show Speed
Slow
Normal
Playing a MPEG4
Fast
JPEG01
MOVE
PHOTO
OK
RETURN
the OK button with a picture
5-2 Press
seleted in the Album sereen. And select a
display mode (Album screen, Slide
show, Rotation or Zoom) using the œ √
buttons, then press the OK button.
1 Insert a MPEG4 Disc into the disc tray.
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
Disc Navigation
DivX
√
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
MOVE
√
√
OK
RETURN
EXIT
DVD-RW(VR)
Press the …† buttons to select the Disc
2 Navigation,
and then press the OK or √
button.
JPEG01
MOVE
PHOTO
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
DivX
√
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
MOVE
√
√
OK
RETURN
Press the …† buttons to select the DivX, and
3 then
press the OK or √ button.
CD
●
●
Press the ANYKEY button to display the menu bar.
Press the RETURN button to clear the menu bar.
EXIT
DivX List
DIVX01
01/02
No.
001
002
Title
ROOT
DIVX01
DIVX02
Size
70.8MB
73.6MB
MPEG4
ROOT
2006/01/01
70.8MB
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select the avi file
4 Press
(DivX), then press the OK, √ or PLAY button.
MPEG4 file is played, you can use
5 When
following functions.
Pressing the STOP button once during playback will
display the file list, pressing the button again will exit the
menu screen.
English -61
Playback
: Returns to the Album screen.
: The DVD Recoder enters slide show mode.
Before the slide show can begin, the picture
interval (Slide show speed) must be set.
: Each time the OK button is pressed, the
picture rotates 90 degrees clockwise.
: Each time the OK button is pressed, the
picture is enlarged up to 4X(Four times the normal
size).
(Normal ➞ Zoom X2 ➞ Zoom X4 ➞ Zoom X2 ➞
Normal)
Disc Navigation
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/10/06 7:10 PM Page 62
MPEG4 Function Description
Function
(
Skip
or )
(
Search
or )
Playing the Title List
Description
During playback, press the SKIP ( or
it moves forward or backward 5 minutes.
) button,
During playback, press the SEARCH ( or )
button and press again to search at a faster speed.
(Fast 1, Fast 2, Fast 3)
Slow Motion In pause or step mode, press the SEARCH ( )
button on the remote control. (Slow 1, Slow 2, Slow 3)
Play
Step Motion Press the STEP( ) button on the remote control
during playback or pause.
Play
■
NOTE
■
This DVD Recorder can play the following
video compression formats.
- MPEG4 Codec format : DivX 3.11 DivX
4.x DivX 5.x DivX-Pro Xvid
- Motion Compensation : QPEL, GMC
- Audio format : “MP3”, “MPEG1 Audio
Layer2”, “LPCM”, “AC3”, “DTS”,
“MS ADPCM”
Supported subtitle file formats: .smi, .srt,
.sub, .psb, .txt, .ass (The subtitle file
should have exactly the same name to
corresponding MPEG4 file name)
Follow these instructions to play back a scene from the
Title List.
Using the TITLE LIST button
1 Press the TITLE LIST button.
The Title List screen is displayed.
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
APR/19/2006
1/6
No.
APR/19/2006 12:00 PR1
■
Some MPEG4 files created on a personal
computer may not be play back.
That is why Codec Type, Version and
Higher resolution over specification is not
supported.
APR/19/2006
SP
MOVE
OK
Title
01 APR/19/2006
02 APR/19/2006
03 APR/20/2006
04 APR/20/2006
05 APR/21/2006
06 APR/21/2006
Length Edit
12:00
12:30
12:00
12:30
12:00
12:30
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
00:08:16
RETURN
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXIT
the …† buttons to select an entry
2 Press
you want to play from Title List, then press
the PLAY button.
The selected entry (title) will be played back.
Playback
3 To stop title play, press the STOP button.
To return the title list screen, press the TITLE LIST
button.
Using the MENU button
1 Press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Title List
√
Playlist
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
MOVE
62- English
OK
RETURN
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 63
the …† buttons to select Title List,
2 Press
then press the OK or √ button twice.
Press the INFO button once again. Then you can
check the information about the title under playback.
The Title List screen is displayed.
DVD-RW(VR)
Name
DVD-RW(VR)
APR/19/2006
1/6
No.
APR/19/2006 12:00 PR1
APR/19/2006
SP
MOVE
Playing Info
APR/21/200612:00 PR1
Title List
Title
01 APR/19/2006
02 APR/19/2006
03 APR/20/2006
04 APR/20/2006
05 APR/21/2006
06 APR/21/2006
OK
Title
5/6
Created Time APR/21/2006 12:00
Length
00:01:43 SP
Playing Time 00:00:08
Title Protection Not Protected
JAN 01 2006 SUN
12:00
Length Edit
12:00
12:30
12:00
12:30
12:00
12:30
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
00:08:16
RETURN
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXIT
the …† buttons to select an entry
3 Press
you want to play from Title List, then press
the OK or √ button.
5 To stop title play, press the STOP button.
To return the title list screen, press the TITLE LIST
button.
The Edit menu is displayed on the right.
■
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
APR/21/2006
5/6
No.
APR/21/2006 12:00 PR1
APR/21/2006
SP
MOVE
NOTE
OK
Title
01 APR/19/2006
02 APR/19/2006
03 APR/20/2006
04 APR/20/2006
05 APR/21/2006
06 APR/21/2006
You can also play a recorded programme
by pressing the ANYKEY button during
playback.
Length Edit
12:00 00:00:21
12:30 00:00:03
Play
12:00 00:00:15
Rename
12:30
00:00:16
Delete00:06:32
12:00
Edit 00:08:16
12:30
Protection
RETURN
√
√
DVD-RW(VR)
√
√
√
Title
5/6
Time
00: 00: 08
Subtitle
√
***
Repeat
Off
Off
Zoom
EXIT
MOVE
(Rename, Delete, Edit, Protection : See pages
66~69)
■
■
4
Press the …† buttons to select Play to play
the title list, then press the OK button.
Off
Audio
D 1+1 L+R
CHANGE
Press the …† buttons to select Title.
Press the œ √ buttons to select to play
the title list, then press the OK button.
The selected entry (title) will be played back.
√ Play
Playback
To view the current status of the disc and progress of
playback : Press the INFO button, the information
about the disc will appear.
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Name
Disc Info
Total Title
6
Total Playlist 2
Recordable Time 00:28 SP
Protection
Not Protected
Screen
Playback
JAN 01 2006 SUN
12:00
English -63
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 64
Title List Screen Elements
3
DVD-RW(VR)
DVD-RW(VR)
APR/21/2006
APR/21/2006
No.
1
2
APR/21/2006 12:00 PR1
APR/21/2006
SP
7
MOVE
4
OK
Title
5
Title List
5/6
Length
No.EditTitle
Title List
6
5/6
Length Edit
√
01 APR/19/2006 12:00 00:00:21
01 APR/19/2006
12:00 00:00:21
√
02 APR/19/2006 12:30 00:00:03
02 APR/19/2006
12:30 00:00:03
Play
√
03 APR/20/2006 12:00 00:00:15
03 APR/20/2006
12:00 00:00:15
Rename
√
04 APR/20/2006 12:30 00:00:16
04 APR/20/2006
12:30 00:00:16
APR/21/2006 12:00 PR12
Delete
√
05 APR/21/2006 12:00 00:06:32
05 APR/21/2006
12:00 00:06:32
APR/21/2006
Edit 00:08:16
√
06 APR/21/2006 12:30 00:08:16
06 APR/21/2006
12:30
SP
Protection
MOVE
RETURN
OKEXIT
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXIT
1. Playback screen for recorded entries.
2. Information window for the selected entry:
Title name, recording date, lock status, recording
mode
3. Recorded entry No.
4. Recorded entry title
5. Recording length (i.e., the playing time)
6. Title list edit items
Play: Plays the selected entry.
Rename: Renames the title of a selected entry.
Delete: Deletes the selected entry from the list.
Edit: Deletes a section of titles.
Protection: Locks or unlocks the selected entry.
7. Button display.
Playback
NOTE
64- English
■
This may depend on the the disc type.
■
DVD-R/DVD-RW(Video) discs have
limited editing function.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_46~65 3/3/06 6:17 PM Page 65
Editing
This section introduces basic functions of DVD
editing and explains both edit functions for the
recording on a disc and edit functions for the entire
disc.
Title List
A title is a section of recorded video and audio.
Title List shows a list to help you select a title.
Since the title list consists of the information on
stream that is actually recorded, if one title is deleted,
that title cannot be played again.
●
Playlist
This refers to a unit of playback, which is made by
selecting a desired scene in the entire Title List.
When one playlist is played, only the scene selected
by the user will play and then stop. Since only the
information necessary for playing a desired scene is
included in a playlist, even if that playlist is deleted,
the original stream will not be deleted.
Recording or editing might not be completed if
an error, such as a sudden power failure
occurs.
Basic Editing (Title List) .....................................66
Advanced Editing (Playlist) ................................70
Please be aware that a material that has been
damaged is unable to be retrieved to its
original content.
Disc Manager .....................................................78
English -65
Editing
●
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:42 PM Page 66
Basic Editing (Title List)
Press the …† œ √ buttons to select the
4 desired
characters, then press the OK
button.
DVD-Recorder
Rename
DVD-RW(VR)
Sports(A1)
Renaming(Labeling) a Title
Follow these instructions to rename a title list entry, i.e.,
to edit the title of a recorded programme.
Save
Back Space
MOVE
Space
OK
Delete
RETURN
Clear
EXIT
Back Space: Deletes the character before the
cursor.
● Space: Enters a blank and moves the cursor one
forward (to the right).
● Delete: Deletes the character at the cursor position.
● Clear: Deletes all the character inputs.
● Save: Registers the character inputs.
●
Using the TITLE LIST button
1 Press the TITLE LIST button.
The Title List screen is displayed
Using the MENU button
●
●
Press the MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Title List, then
press the OK or √ button twice.
DVD-RW(VR)
the …† œ √ buttons to select Save,
5 Press
then press the OK button.
The changed title name is displayed on the title item
of the selected entry.
Title List
APR/19/2006
1/6
No.
APR/19/2006 12:00 PR1
APR/19/2006
SP
Title
Length Edit
01 APR/19/2006
02 APR/19/2006
03 APR/20/2006
04 APR/20/2006
05 APR/21/2006
06 APR/21/2006
12:00
12:30
12:00
12:30
12:00
12:30
√
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
00:08:16
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
No.
√
√
√
√
Sports (A1)
APR/21/2006
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
SP
MOVE
the …† buttons to select an entry
2 Press
you want to rename from the Title List,
then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
APR/21/2006
5/6
No.
APR/21/2006 12:00 PR1
APR/21/2006
SP
Editing
MOVE
Title
Length Edit
01 APR/19/2006
02 APR/19/2006
03 APR/20/2006
04 APR/20/2006
05 APR/21/2006
06 APR/21/2006
OK
12:00 00:00:21 √
12:30 00:00:03 √
Play
12:00 00:00:15 √
Rename
12:30
00:00:16 √
Delete00:06:32 √
12:00
Edit 00:08:16 √
12:30
Protection
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Rename,
3 then
press the OK button.
The Rename screen is displayed.
Rename
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
APR/21/2006 12:00 PR1
Save
Back Space
MOVE
66- English
Space
OK
Delete
RETURN
Clear
EXIT
Title
01 APR/19/2006
02 APR/19/2006
03 APR/20/2006
04 APR/20/2006
05 Sports (A1)
06 APR/21/2006
√
OK
Length Edit
12:00
12:30
12:00
12:30
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
12:30 00:08:16
RETURN
EXIT
√
√
√
√
√
√
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:42 PM Page 67
Locking(Protecting) a Title
Follow these instructions to lock an entry to protect it
from accidental deletion.
the œ √ buttons to select On, then
4 Press
press the OK button. The key icon on the
information window for the selected entry
changes to the locked status. ( ➝ )
DVD-RW(VR)
1
Press the TITLE LIST button.
APR/21/2006
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
00:08:16
√
√
√
√
√
√
SP
MOVE
Using the MENU button
●
5/6
Sports(A1)
The Title List screen is displayed
●
Title List
Sports (A1)
Using the TITLE LIST button
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Title List, then
press the OK or √ button twice.
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Drama
Deleting a Title
1/6
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
Drama
APR/19/2006
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
00:08:16
√
√
Follow these instructions to delete an entry from the
Title List.
√
√
√
√
SP
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Using the TITLE LIST button
2
Press the …† buttons to select an entry
you want to protect in the Title List, then
press the OK or √ button.
1 Press the TITLE LIST button.
The Title List screen is displayed
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
Sports (A1)
APR/21/2006
SP
MOVE
3
OK
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
Play 00:00:15
Rename
00:00:16
Delete
00:06:32
Edit 00:08:16
Protection
RETURN
Using the MENU button
●
√
√
√
√
●
Press the MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Title List, then
press the OK or √ button twice.
√
√
Press the …† buttons to select Protection,
then press the OK or √ button.
Drama
APR/19/2006
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
00:08:16
√
√
√
√
√
√
SP
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
APR/21/2006
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
SP
OK
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
Play00:00:15
Rename
00:00:16
Delete
00:06:32
Edit00:08:16
Protection
RETURN
√
√
√
√
√
the …† buttons to select an entry
2 Press
you want to delete in the Title List, then
press the OK or √ button.
√
EXIT
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Sports (A1)
DVD-RW(VR)
5/6
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
Sports (A1)
APR/21/2006
Title Protection :
Sports (A1)
On
APR/21/2006
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
SP
MOVE
Off
No.
OK
RETURN
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
Play 00:00:15
Rename
00:00:16
Delete
00:06:32
Edit 00:08:16
Protection
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXIT
SP
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
English -67
Editing
Sports (A1)
MOVE
1/6
Drama
MOVE
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:42 PM Page 68
Press the …† buttons to select Delete,
3 then
press the OK or √ button.
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
Sports (A1)
APR/21/2006
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
SP
MOVE
Deleting a Section of a Title
Follow these instructions to delete a section of a Title
List entry.
OK
(VR mode)
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
Play 00:00:15
Rename
00:00:16
Delete
00:06:32
Edit 00:08:16
Protection
RETURN
√
√
Using the TITLE LIST button
√
√
√
√
EXIT
You will be prompted with a confirmation
message.
DVD-RW(VR mode) : Since Playlist is present,
the message ‘Do you want to delete?(Related
Playlists may be deleted.)’ is displayed.
1 Press the TITLE LIST button.
The Title List screen is displayed
Using the MENU button
●
●
Press the MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Title List, then
press the OK or √ button twice.
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Drama
DVD-RW(VR)
1/6
Title List
Sports (A1)
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
5/6
Do you want to delete?
(Related playlists
Drama
may be deleted.)
APR/19/2006
Sports (A1)
Yes
MOVE
OK
RETURN
OK
RETURN
DVD-RW(VR)
Press the œ √ buttons to select Yes, then
press the OK button.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
Sports (A1)
MOVE
Editing
68- English
√
5/6
Title
SP
You cannot delete a protected entry.
If you want to delete a protected entry,
select “Off” in the Title Protection menu.
(See page 67)
Once an entry is deleted from the Title
List it cannot be recovered.
■
Once DVD-R, DVD-RW is finalised, it
cannot be deleted.
With DVD-R, titles are only deleted from
the menu however, the Title remains
physically on the disc.
OK
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
Play 00:00:15
Rename
00:00:16
Delete
00:06:32
Edit 00:08:16
Protection
RETURN
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Edit, then
press the OK or √ button.
3 Press
The Edit Title List screen is display
When the Disc Protection has been set to
Protected, you cannot delete titles.
(See page 79)
■
■
√
Title List
No.
APR/21/2006
■
√
EXIT
Sports (A1)
■
√
the …† buttons to select an entry
2 Press
you want to edit from the Title List, then
press the OK or √ button.
The message may depend on the type of disc.
NOTE
√
EXIT
DVD-RW(Video mode), DVD-R: Since Playlist is
not present, the message ‘Do you want to delete?’
is displayed.
4
√
No
SP
●
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:06:32
00:08:16
SP
APR/21/2006
MOVE
Length Edit
DVD-RW(VR)
Edit Title List
Title List No. 05
Start
End
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
√
Start
End
MOVE
Delete
OK
Return
RETURN
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:42 PM Page 69
4 Press the OK button at the starting point.
The image and starting point time are displayed in the
section deletion starting point window.
6 Press the OK button at the Delete.
The message ‘Do you want to delete?
(Deleted part will not be restored.)’ is displayed.
Edit Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Edit Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List No. 05
Start
End
Title List No. 05
Start
End
Do you want to delete?
(Deleted part will not be restored.)
00:00:06
00:10:15
00:00:00
Yes
00:00:06
√
Start
End
MOVE
Delete
OK
Start
Return
RETURN
MOVE
EXIT
DVD-RW(VR)
Delete
OK
00:10:15
Return
RETURN
EXIT
œ √ buttons to select Yes, then press
7 Press
the OK button.
Edit Title List Screen Elements
➃
➂
End
No
The selected section has been deleted.
To return to the Title List screen, press the œ √
buttons to select Return.
Edit Title List
Title List No. 05
Start
End
00:00:06
①
00:00:00
00:00:06
√
Start
End
MOVE
Delete
OK
②
Return
RETURN
EXIT
1. Playback bar
2. Playtime
3. Section deletion starting point window and time
4. Section deletion end point window and time
● Select the start and end points of the section you
want to delete using the playback related buttons.
● Playback related buttons: (
,
, , , ).
5 Press the OK button at the end point.
The image and end point time are displayed in the
Section deletion ending point window.
■
The length of the section to be deleted
must be at least 5 seconds long.
■
If the length of the section to be deleted is
less than 5 seconds, you will be prompted
with the message 'The range is too
short.'.
■
If the end time precedes the starting
point, you will be prompted with the
message ‘End point cannot be marked
earlier than start point’.
■
The section cannot be deleted when it
includes a still picture.
■
Press the MENU button after the
operation has finished. The Edit Title List
screen will disappear.
NOTE
Edit Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title ListNo. 05
Start
End
00:00:06
Start
00:10:15
00:10:15
»
End
MOVE
Delete
OK
Return
RETURN
EXIT
Editing
English -69
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:42 PM Page 70
5 Press the OK button at the end point.
Advanced Editing
(Playlist)
DVD-Recorder
Make Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 001
Start
End
Title List : 1/6
Creating a Playlist
Start
Follow these instructions to create a new playlist entry
from a recorded title.
●
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Playlist, then
2 press
the OK or √ button.
Playlist
●
Title List
New Playlist
√
Playlist
Edit Playlist
√
EXIT
A new Scene will be added to the current Playlist.
A new Make Scene screen is displayed.
■
You can check and see all the scenes on
Edit Playlist screen.
■
Repeat steps 1~6 if you want to make a
new playlist.
■
Repeat steps 4~6 if you want to make
scenes of the playlist.
NOTE
RETURN
RETURN
The image and end point time are displayed in the
End window.
The yellow-coloured selection bar moves to the
Make item.
Programme
OK
Return
OK
6 Press the OK button at the Make item.
Disc Manager
Setup
Make
- To make a new playlist -
DVD-RW(VR)
MOVE
00:10:00
00:10:00
End
MOVE
(VR mode)
DVD-Recorder
00:00:10
»
EXIT
the …† buttons to select New
3 Press
Playlist, then press the OK or √ button.
The Make Scene screen is displayed.
DVD-Recorder
Make Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 001
Start
End
Title List : 1/6
00:00:00
√
- To return to Edit Playlist menu -
the œ √ buttons to select Return,
7 Press
then press the OK button.
The Edit Playlist screen is displayed.
00:00:00
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
00:00:00
APR/25/2006
Start
End
Make
5/5
Return
No.
MOVE
4
OK
RETURN
APR/25/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/25/2006 12:00
Press the OK button at the start point.
MOVE
DVD-Recorder
Title
01 APR/23/2006 12:00
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
EXIT
OK
RETURN
Length Edit
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:00:32
√
√
√
√
√
EXIT
Make Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Editing
Scene No. 001
Start
End
Title List : 1/6
00:00:10
End
MOVE
●
●
Make
OK
Return
RETURN
EXIT
The image and time at the start point are
displayed on the Start window.
The yellow-coloured selection bar moves to the
End item.
Select the starting point of the section from
which you want to create a new scene using the
playback related buttons ( ,
, ,
, ,
, ).
70- English
The Edit Playlist screen will disappear.
00:00:10
√
Start
●
00:00:00
the MENU or PLAY LIST button after
8 Press
the operation has finished.
NOTE
■
You can create up to 99 playlist entries.
■
Depending on the kind of disc, the
displayed screen may have a slight
difference.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:42 PM Page 71
Playing Entries in the Playlist
Follow these instructions to play the playlist entries.
the …† buttons to select Play, then
3 Press
select the OK button.
√ Play
(VR mode)
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the PLAY LIST button.
The Edit Playlist screen is displayed.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
APR/23/2006
1/5
No.
APR/23/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/23/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
●
Length Edit
01 APR/23/2006 12:00
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:00:32
√
√
√
√
√
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Name
OK
RETURN
●
●
Disc Info
EXIT
Total Title
Total Playlist
Recordable Time
Protection
Screen
JAN 01 2006 SUN
Using the MENU button
●
To view the current status of the disc and progress
of playback : Press the INFO button, and the
information about the disc will appear.
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode, press the
MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Playlist, then
press the OK or √ button.
Press the …† buttons to select Edit Playlist,
then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
●
19
5
01:09 SP
Not Protected
Playback [ Playlist ]
13:00
Press the INFO button once again. Then you can
check the information about the playlist currently
playing back.
Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Title Menu
New Playlist
√
Playlist
Edit Playlist
√
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select the title you
want to edit from the Playlist, then press the
2 Press
OK or √ button.
The Edit Playlist menu is displayed : Play, Rename,
Edit Scene, Copy, Delete.
●
DVD-RW(VR)
Name
Playing Info
APR/24/2006 12:00 PR1
Playlist
Created Time
Length
Playing Time
Total scene
JAN 01 2006 SUN
3/5
APR/24/2006 12:00
00: 01: 09 SP
00: 00: 08
1
13:00
The screen returns to the Edit Playlist screen when
the playback has finished.
4 Press the STOP button to stop playing.
The screen returns to the Edit Playlist screen.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
APR/24/2006
3/5
No.
Length Edit
√
√
Editing
01 APR/23/2006 12:00 00:00:21
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
Play 00:00:03
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
00:00:15
Rename
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
00:00:16
Edit Scene
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
Copy 00:00:32
APR/24/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
√
√
√
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
English -71
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/15/06 11:03 AM Page 72
Renaming a Playlist Entry
Follow these instructions to rename a playlist entry, i.e.
to edit the title of a playlist entry.
the desired characters using the
4 Enter
…† œ √ buttons.
DVD-Recorder
Rename
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
(VR mode)
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the PLAY LIST button.
Save
Back Space
The Edit Playlist screen is displayed.
DVD-RW(VR)
Edit Playlist
APR/23/2006
1/5
No.
APR/23/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/23/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
Length Edit
01 APR/23/2006 12:00
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
OK
00:00:21
00:00:03
00:00:15
00:00:16
00:00:32
RETURN
√
√
√
√
●
●
the …† buttons to select the title you
2 Press
want to edit from the Playlist, then press the
OK or √ button.
The Edit Playlist menu is displayed :Play, Rename,
Edit Scene, Copy, Delete
Edit Playlist
APR/24/2006
3/5
No.
APR/24/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
Editing
MOVE
Title
Length Edit
01 APR/23/2006 12:00 00:00:21
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
Play 00:00:03
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
00:00:15
Rename
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
00:00:16
Edit Scene
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
Copy 00:00:32
√
√
√
√
√
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Rename, then
3 press
the OK button.
The Rename screen is displayed.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
APR/24/2006
3/5
No.
72- English
Length Edit
01 APR/23/2006 12:00 00:00:21
Play 00:00:03
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
00:00:15
Rename
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
00:00:16
Edit Scene
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
Copy 00:00:32
APR/24/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
●
Delete
RETURN
Clear
EXIT
This function is the same as the Rename
function in renaming the title list. (See page 66.)
The maximum number of characters that can be
entered is 31. All 31 characters can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button twice.
the …† œ √ buttons to select Save,
then press the OK button.
5 Press
EXIT
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode, press the
MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Playlist, then
press the OK or √ button.
Press the …† buttons to select Edit Playlist,
then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-RW(VR)
●
OK
√
Using the MENU button
●
MOVE
Space
√
√
√
√
√
The changed title is displayed in the title field of the
selected playlist entry.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
3/5
No.
Dolphin
1 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
01 APR/23/2006
02 APR/23/2006
03 Dolphin
04 APR/24/2006
05 APR/25/2006
OK
RETURN
Length Edit
12:00 00:00:21 √
12:30 00:00:03 √
00:00:15 √
12:30 00:00:16 √
12:00 00:00:32 √
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:42 PM Page 73
Editing a Scene for the Playlist
Playing a Selected Scene
Follow these instructions to edit scenes for a playlist.
(VR mode)
1
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the PLAY LIST button.
the …† œ √ buttons to select the
4 Press
scene you want to play, then press the OK
button.
The playlist entry to be played is selected.
The Edit Playlist screen is displayed.
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Science
Play
1/4
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Modify
Length Edit
00:00:17
00:00:06
00:00:06
00:00:37
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
OK
RETURN
Move
Add
√
√
√
OK
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
EXIT
Using the MENU button
●
02 00:00:07
MOVE
MOVE
●
01 00:00:26
√
Science
7 Scene
APR/24/2006 10:43
●
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode, press the
MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Playlist, then
press the OK or √ button.
Press the …† buttons to select Edit Playlist,
then press the OK or √ button.
5 Press the OK button.
The selected scene is played.
√ Play
the …† buttons to select the title you
want to edit from the Playlist, then press the
2 Press
OK or √ button.
The Edit Playlist menu is displayed : Play, Rename,
Edit Scene, Copy, Delete
●
To stop scene play, press the STOP button.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
3/4
No.
01
02
03
04
Dolphin
7 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
Length Edit
Science
00:00:17
Sky
00:00:06
Play
Dolphin
00:00:06
Rename
Natural
00:00:37
Edit Scene
√
√
√
√
Copy
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Edit
3 Scene,
then press the OK button.
The Edit Scene screen is displayed.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
3/4
No.
01
02
03
04
Dolphin
7 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
Editing
Dolphin
Length Edit
Science
00:00:17
Sky
00:00:06
Play
Dolphin
00:00:06
Rename
Natural
00:00:37
Edit Scene
√
√
√
√
Copy
Delete
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
Edit Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
1/7
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
Move
Add
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
English -73
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 74
Modifying a Scene (Replacing a Scene)
the OK button at the end point of the
7 Press
scene.
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 in page 73.
DVD-Recorder
Modify Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 002
Start
End
the …† œ √ buttons to select the
4 Press
scene you want to modify, then press the
OK button.
Title List : 5/6
Start
00:00:30
00:00:30
End
Change
MOVE
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
00:00:25
»
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
●
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
The image and ending point time are displayed in
the End window.
Move
Add
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
Press the œ √ buttons to select Change, then
8 press
the OK button.
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
the …† buttons to select Modify,
5 Press
then press the OK button.
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
The Modify Scene screen is displayed.
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
Move
Add
DVD-Recorder
Modify Scene
MOVE
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 002
Start
End
●
Title List : 5/6
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
√
Start
End
MOVE
Change
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
the OK button at the start point of the
6 Press
scene.
DVD-Recorder
Modify Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 002
Start
End
Title List : 5/6
00:00:25
End
MOVE
Editing
●
●
00:00:00
00:00:25
√
Start
Change
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
The image and starting point time are displayed
on the Start window.
Select the starting or ending point of the section
you want to modify using the playback related
buttons ( ,
, ,
, , , ).
74- English
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
The scene you want to modify is changed with the
selected section.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 75
Moving a Scene (Changing the Position of a Scene)
■
You cannot move the selected scene to the
position of the next scene, because the
selected scene should be inserted before
that position, which requires no action.
■
Depending on the kind of disc, the displayed
screen may have a slight difference.
NOTE
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 in page 73.
the …† œ √ buttons to select the
4 Press
scene you want to move (change the
position), then press the OK button.
Adding a Scene
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
3/7
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
To setup, follow steps 1 to 3 in page 73.
Play
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
Move
Add
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
MOVE
OK
06 00:00:04
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
the …† œ √ buttons to select the
4 Press
scene that will have a new scene inserted
before it, then press the OK button.
A yellow selection window is displayed on the scene
to be added as the new scene.
the …† buttons to select Move, then
5 Press
press the OK button.
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
4/7
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
3/7
Edit Scene
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
Move
Add
Playlist No. 3
Play
Delete
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
MOVE
03 00:00:04
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Move
Add
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
MOVE
●
OK
06 00:00:04
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Add, then
5 press
the OK button.
A yellow selection window is displayed on the
scene to be moved.
DVD-Recorder
Add Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 004
Start
End
the …† œ √ buttons to select the
6 Press
position to which you want to move the
selected scene, then press the OK button.
Title List : 4/6
00:00:00
00:00:00
Start
End
MOVE
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
6/7
00:00:00
√
Add
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
Move
Add
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
OK
06 00:00:04
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
DVD-Recorder
Add Scene
Editing
MOVE
the OK button at the starting point of
the scene.
6 Press
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 004
Start
End
●
The selected scene is moved to the selected
position.
Title List : 4/6
00:00:15
Start
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
5/7
Edit Scene
00:00:00
00:00:15
√
End
MOVE
Add
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:03
04 00:00:11
05 00:00:04
06 00:00:04
Move
●
Add
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
●
The image and starting point time are displayed in
the Start window.
Select the end point of the section where you want
to add the new scene using the playback related
buttons ( ,
, , , ).
English -75
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 76
the OK button at the end point of the
7 Press
scene.
DVD-Recorder
Copying a Playlist Entry to the
Playlist
Add Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 004
Start
End
Using the PLAY LIST button
Title List : 4/6
00:00:15
00:00:35
00:00:35
Start
End
Add
MOVE
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the PLAY LIST button.
The Edit Playlist screen is displayed.
●
●
8
The image and time of the end point are displayed
in the End window.
To cancel, press the œ √ buttons to select cancel,
then press the OK button.
Science
00:00:17
√
02 Sky
00:00:06
√
03 Dolphin
00:00:06
√
04 Natural
00:00:37
√
APR/23/2006 06:43
Playlist No. 3
OK
RETURN
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:20
05 00:00:03
06 00:00:11
●
Move
●
Add
OK
Delete
●
RETURN
EXIT
The section you want to add is inserted prior to the
scene selected in step 4.
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode, press the
MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Playlist, then press
the OK or √ button.
Press the …† buttons to select Edit Playlist, then
press the OK or √ button.
the …† buttons to select the title you
2 Press
want to copy to the Playlist, then press the
OK or √ button.
The Edit Playlist menu is displayed :Play, Rename,
Edit Scene, Copy, Delete
Deleting a Scene
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
To setup, follow the steps 1 to 3 in page 73.
Dolphin
3/4
No.
Title
01 Science
Press the …† œ √ buttons to select the
scene you want to delete, then press the
OK button.
02 Sky
03 Dolphin
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
Move
Add
7 Scene
√
√
APR/23/2006 06:43
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
OK
RETURN
Press the …† buttons to select Copy, then
the OK button.
3 press
Playlist that has been selected will be copied.
Delete
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Delete,
then press the OK button.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
3/4
Title
02 Sky
03 Dolphin
04 Natural
Dolphin
Edit Scene
MOVE
Length Edit
00:00:17
√
00:00:06
Play
00:00:06
Rename
00:00:37
√
√
√
Edit Scene
7 Scene
Copy
APR/23/2006 06:43
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/6
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
02 00:00:04
03 00:00:03
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
5/5
Move
No.
Title
01
02
03
04
05
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Dolphin
Add
05 00:00:04
06 00:00:05
Delete
Dolphin
MOVE
√
Copy
01 Science
04 00:00:11
√
00:00:06
Play
00:00:06
Rename
00:00:37
Edit Scene
No.
01 00:00:26
00:00:17
Playlist No. 3
Play
5
Length Edit
Edit Scene
Modify
Editing
04 Natural
Dolphin
MOVE
MOVE
EXIT
Using the MENU button
Modify
4
Length Edit
01 Science
Edit Scene
Play
●
Title
1 Scene
MOVE
MOVE
3/4
No.
Press the œ √ buttons to select Add, then
press the OK button.
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
4/8
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Science
OK
RETURN
EXIT
7 Scene
Length Edit
00:00:17
00:00:06
00:00:06
00:00:37
00:00:06
√
√
√
√
√
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
76- English
OK
RETURN
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 77
■
You can create up to 999 scenes on one
disc. In some cases, this may be different
from the actual numbers.
■
Press the MENU button after the
operation has finished. The Edit Playlist
screen will disappear.
NOTE
Press the …† buttons to select Delete,
3 then
press the OK button.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
5/5
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Dolphin
7 Scene
Title
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Dolphin
Deleting a Playlist Entry from
the Playlist
Using the PLAYLIST button
●
00:00:17
Play 00:00:06
00:00:06
Rename
00:00:37
Edit Scene
Copy00:00:06
OK
RETURN
The Edit Playlist screen is displayed.
√
√
You will be prompted with the delete confirmation
message “Do you want to delete?”.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
5/5
Do you want to delete?
Yes
Dolphin
7 Scene
No
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
1/5
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Science
1 Scene
Title
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Dolphin
Length Edit
00:00:17
00:00:06
00:00:06
00:00:37
00:00:06
√
√
√
√
√
OK
RETURN
the œ √ buttons to select Yes, then
4 Press
press the OK button.
It automatically returned to the Edit Playlist screen
after the delete operation has finished.
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
√
APR/23/2006 06:43
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Science
√
EXIT
Dolphin
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the PLAY LIST button.
√
Delete
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
Length Edit
EXIT
Using the MENU button
●
●
●
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode, press the
MENU button.
Press the …† buttons to select Playlist, then
press the OK or √ button.
Press the …† buttons to select Edit Playlist, then
press the OK or √ button.
5/5
Deleting...
(Please wait)
Dolphin
7 Scene
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
the …† buttons to select the title you
want to delete from the Playlist, then press
2 Press
the OK or √ button.
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
OK
Edit Playlist
4/4
Natural
No.
Title
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Length Edit
00:00:17
00:00:06
00:00:06
00:00:37
√
√
√
√
Natural
1 Scene
APR/23/2006 06:43
5/5
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Dolphin
7 Scene
Title
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Dolphin
OK
Length Edit
00:00:17
Play 00:00:06
00:00:06
Rename
00:00:37
Edit Scene
Copy00:00:06
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
√
√
√
√
√
Delete
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
01
02
03
04
Editing
Dolphin
EXIT
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
The Edit Playlist menu is displayed :Play, Rename,
Edit Scene, Copy, Delete
DVD-RW(VR)
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
English -77
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 78
the desired characters using the
4 Enter
…† œ √ buttons.
Disc Manager
DVD-Recorder
Rename
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc
Editing the Disc Name
Save
Follow these instructions to give a name to a disc.
Back Space
MOVE
●
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
●
Space
OK
Delete
Clear
RETURN
EXIT
This function is the same as the Rename
function in renaming the title list. (See page 66.)
The maximum number of characters that can be
entered is 31. All 31 characters can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button.
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Title List
√
Playlist
Disc Manager
the …† œ √ buttons to select Save,
5 Press
then press the OK button.
A disc name is given to the disc.
Programme
Setup
DVD-Recorder
MOVE
2
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Disc
Manager, then press the OK or √ button.
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
Programme
Setup
MOVE
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
Programme
Setup
√
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Disc
3 Press
Name, then press the OK or √ button.
The Edit Name screen is displayed.
DVD-Recorder
Rename
Editing
DVD-RW(VR)
Save
Back Space
MOVE
78- English
Space
OK
Delete
RETURN
Clear
EXIT
■
You may need to clear disc protect before
beginning editing.
■
Depending on the kind of disc, the
displayed screen may be different.
NOTE
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 79
Disc Protection
Formatting a Disc
Disc Protection allows you to protect your discs from
being formatted or deleted due to unintended
operations.
1
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the MENU button.
Use these instructions to format a disc.
The disc protect should also be cleared.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
DVD-Recorder
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Title List
Title List
√
Playlist
Title List
√
Playlist
Disc Manager
Programme
Disc Manager
Setup
Programme
Setup
MOVE
MOVE
OK
RETURN
the …† buttons to select Disc
2 Press
Manager, then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
Programme
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
Setup
MOVE
OK
: DVD-VR
RETURN
EXIT
the …† buttons to select Disc
3 Press
Protection, then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection
Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
Protected
DVD-VR
√
Programme
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
Setup
MOVE
OK
√
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Disc
then press the OK or √ button.
2 Manager,
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
Programme
Setup
√
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Disc
then press the OK or √ button.
3 Format,
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
Programme
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
Setup
MOVE
OK
√
: DVD-VR
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
Disc Manager
DVD-RW
● You will be prompted with the confirmation
message “Choose the recording format for
DVD-RW.”
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Protected
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
√
Programme
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
Format : format
DVD-VR
ChooseDisc
the recording
for DVD-RW
Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Programme
Delete
All
Title
Lists
DVD-VR
DVD-V
Setup
Setup
MOVE
OK
: DVD-VR
RETURN
EXIT
MOVE
OK
RETURN
√
√
EXIT
English -79
Editing
the …† button to select Protected,
4 Press
then Press the OK button.
DVD-Recorder
OK
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 80
the œ √ buttons to select desired
4 Press
mode, then press the OK button.
●
You will be prompted again with the message
“All data will be deleted. Do you want to
continue?”.
DVD-Recorder
Press the …† buttons to select Disc
2 Manager,
then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
All data will be deleted.
Disc Format : DVD-VR
Do you want to continue?
Disc Finalize
√
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
√
Programme
Setup
MOVE
OK
Disc Protection : Not Protected
RETURN
Setup
√
: DVD-VR
√
√
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
√
MOVE
√
DVD-V
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
DVD-VR and DVD-V are defined according to
their recording format.
DVD-VR
OK
Press the …† button to select Delete All
3 Title
Lists, then press the OK or √ button.
EXIT
the œ √ buttons to select Yes, then
5 Press
press the OK button.
The disc is formatted.
DISC
Disc Name :
Playlist
Programme
Disc Name :
Disc Manager
Title List
Disc Manager Disc Format
Disc Manager
Title List
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
Programme
Setup
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
MOVE
●
√
: DVD-VR
OK
RETURN
EXIT
You will be prompted with the confirmation
message “Do you want to delete all title lists?”.
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Discwant
Format
: DVD-VR
Do you
to delete
all title lists?
Disc Manager
Delete All Title Lists
√
Setup
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
√
MOVE
●
1
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the MENU button.
DVD-Recorder
√
Programme
Disc Finalize
OK
RETURN
EXIT
When Protected Entry exists: The Delete All Title
List function will not operate. If there is a title
containing a still picture, however, that function will
not operate. If you want to delete a protected entry,
disable Protect for it on the Lock item.
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Title List
√
Playlist
Disc Manager
All title lists are deleted.
Programme
Editing
Setup
MOVE
80- English
Press the œ √ buttons to select Yes, then
4 press
the OK button.
OK
RETURN
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 81
You will be prompted with the message “Do you want
to finalise disc?”.
Finalising a disc
After you record titles onto a DVD-RW/DVD-R disc with
your DVD recorder, it needs to be finalised before it can
be played back on external devices.
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc
DVD-VR
youFormat
want to: finalise
disc?
Disc Manager Do
1
With the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
press the MENU button.
Programme
Setup
√
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
√
MOVE
DVD-Recorder
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Title List
If you select Yes, you will be prompted again with the
message “Disc will be finalised. Do you want to
continue?”.
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
√
Disc Finalize
Title List
√
Playlist
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
DVD-Recorder
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
EXIT
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc
will be: finalised.
Format
DVD-VR
Disc Manager Disc
Do you want to continue?
Programme Disc Finalize
2
Press the …† buttons to select Disc
Manager, then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
Setup
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
MOVE
MOVE
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
■
Once a disc is finalised, you cannot
delete entries from the record list.
■
After being finalised, the DVD-R/DVDRW(video mode) operates in the same
manner as a DVD-Video.
■
Depending on the disc type, the displayed
screen may be different.
Disc Manager
■
Finalising time may be different
depending on the amount of data
recorded on the disc.
■
Data on the disc will be damaged if the
DVD Recorder is powered off during
finalise process.
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc Manager
Disc Format
√
√
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
MOVE
RETURN
√
The disc is finalised.
EXIT
the …† button to select Disc
Finalise, then press the OK or √ button.
3 Press
Setup
OK
√
the œ √ buttons to select Yes, then
4 Press
press the OK button.
NOTE
Programme
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Programme
Setup
√
OK
RETURN
Editing
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
Disc Manager
DVD-R(V)
Title List
Disc Name :
√
Disc Manager Disc Protection : Not Protected
Programme
Setup
MOVE
√
Disc Finalise
√
Delete All Title Lists
√
OK
RETURN
EXIT
English -81
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_66~82 3/3/06 6:43 PM Page 82
Unfinalising a disc (V/VR mode)
the œ √ buttons to select Yes, then
4 Press
press the OK button.
The disc is unfinalised.
the DVD Recorder in Stop mode,
1 With
press the MENU button.
■
NOTE
DVD-Recorder
A DVD-RW can be finalised or unfinalised
in Video mode.
Title List
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Title List
√
Mark
Playlist
Disc Manager
Finalise
Unfinalise
DVD-Video(RW)
DVD-RW(V)
Additional recording, protection
Operation Same as DVD-Video
Programme
and deletion are possible.
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† buttons to select Disc
2 Manager,
then press the OK or √ button.
DVD-Recorder
■
A DVD-RW can be finalised or unfinalised
in VR mode.
Finalise
Unfinalise
Mark
DVD-RW(VR:F)
DVD-RW(VR)
Operation
Additional recording,
deletion, editing and
protection are impossible.
Additional recording,
deletion, editing and
protection are possible.
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
√
Playlist
Disc Format : DVD-VR
√
Disc Manager
Disc Unfinalise
√
Programme
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Press the …† button to select Disc
then press the OK or √ button.
3 Unfinalise,
You will be prompted with the message “Do you want
to unfinalise disc?”.
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Format
: DVD-VRdisc?
you want
to unfinalise
Disc ManagerDoDisc
Programme
Yes
Setup
MOVE
Editing
√
Disc Finalize
OK
No
RETURN
EXIT
If you select Yes, you will be prompted again with the
message “Disc will be unfinalised. Do you want to
continue?”.
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
√
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
√
Disc will be unfinalised.
Disc Manager Disc Format : DVD-VR
Do you want to continue?
Disc Finalize
Programme
Yes
No
Setup
MOVE
82- English
OK
RETURN
√
EXIT
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_83~87 3/3/06 6:22 PM Page 83
Troubleshooting
Additional
Information
If your DVD Recorder malfunctions, go through the
checkpoints below before contacting a Samsung authorised service centre.
Power
The input is displayed for a while when the
power is turned on.
Checkpoint 1
The DVD recorder requires some time
to initialize and the input will be
displayed for approx. 10 seconds after
it is turned on.
Recording
Cannot record TV programmes.
Checkpoint 1
Check whether the power cord is
securely plugged into the power outlet.
Checkpoint 2
Did you set the DVD recorder channel
settings correctly?
Checkpoint 3
Check the free space on your
DVD-RW/DVD-R discs.
I pressed the REC button but there is no response.
Checkpoint 1
Recording is possible for DVD-RW/
DVD-R discs only.
If a programme is copy protected, it
cannot be recorded.
Additional Information
Troubleshooting ................................................83
Specifications....................................................87
English -83
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_83~87 3/3/06 6:22 PM Page 84
Playback
The angle operation does not work while playing a
DVD disc.
Cannot play the disc.
Checkpoint 1
Checkpoint 1
Check whether the disc is inserted
correctly with the label facing up.
Checkpoint 2
Check the regional code of the DVD
disc.
Checkpoint 3
This DVD recorder cannot play some
types of discs. (See pages 5, 46.)
The angle operation is available only
when the disc contains images
captured from different angles.
The selected audio and/or subtitle language is not
played.
icon appears on the screen.
Checkpoint 1
Checkpoint 1
You cannot use this operation or
function due to one of the following
reasons:
(1) Your DVD disc restricts it.
(2) Your DVD disc does not support this
feature (for example: angles)
(3) The feature is not available at the
moment.
(4) You've requested a title, chapter, or
scan time that is out of range.
Play mode settings are different from the settings
configured in the Settings menu.
Checkpoint 1
The disc does not support all selected
functions. In this case, some settings
configured in the settings menu may
not work properly.
Additional Information
Cannot change the aspect ratio.
Checkpoint 1
84- English
The aspect ratio is fixed for DVD discs.
(See pages 31~32.)
Audio and subtitle languages are
disc-specific. Only the sound and
subtitle languages contained on the
DVD disc are available and displayed in
the disc menu.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_83~87 3/3/06 6:22 PM Page 85
Video
Timer Recording
The disc revolves, but no image or bad quality
images are displayed.
Timer lamp flickers.
Checkpoint 1
Be sure that the Video Setting is
properly set. (See pages 31~32).
Checkpoint 2
Check whether there is damage to or
any foreign material on your disc.
Checkpoint 3
Some low quality discs may not play
properly.
Checkpoint 4
If scenes change from dark to bright
suddenly, the screen may shake
vertically temporarily, but this is not a
fault.
Checkpoint 1
Check there is enough space in the
disc for recording.
Checkpoint 2
Check whether the current disc is
recordable or not.
Make sure to check before the start
time of recording.
Timer recording does not work properly.
Checkpoint 1
Re-check the recording time and the
end time settings again.
Checkpoint 2
Recording will be cancelled if the power
is interrupted due to a power failure or
another similar reason while recording.
Sound
No sound.
Checkpoint 1
Are you watching a programme in slow
or skip mode?
If you are playing a programme at a
speed other than normal or Fast 1 speed,
sound will not be heard.
Checkpoint 2
Check the connections and settings.
(See pages 19~20, 29~30)
Checkpoint 3
Check whether the disc is damaged.
Clean the disc, if necessary.
Checkpoint 4
Check whether the disc is inserted
correctly with the label facing up.
No audio output.
Checkpoint 1
Additional Information
Check whether you have selected the
correct digital output options in the
Audio Output Options menu.
(See page 29.)
English -85
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_83~87 3/3/06 6:22 PM Page 86
Remote Control
Other problems.
The remote control doesn't work.
Checkpoint 1
Point the remote control at the remote
control sensor on your DVD recorder.
Allow for proper distance. Remove
obstacles between your DVD recorder
and the remote control.
Checkpoint 2
Check whether the batteries are empty.
Checkpoint 3
Check for the TV or DVD button.
Other
I forgot my password for parental supervision.
Checkpoint 1
Press and hold down the PROG (
)
buttons on the front panel of the
DVD Recorder simultaneously for more
than 5 seconds with no disc in the
DVD Recorder. All settings including the
password will revert to the factory settings. Do not use this unless absolutely
necessary. (Note that this function is possible only when no disc is inserted.)
Is it possible to change a subtitle and an audio signal on a recorded disc?
Additional Information
Checkpoint 1
86- English
A recorded disc is played with only the
subtitle and the audio signal which
were selected during recording.
Checkpoint 1
Read the table of contents and then
find and read the section describing
your problem, follow the instructions
given.
Checkpoint 2
Turn your DVD recorder off and on.
Checkpoint 3
If the problem still persists, contact a
nearby Samsung service centre.
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_83~87 3/3/06 6:22 PM Page 87
Specifications
Power requirements
110-240V AC, 50/60Hz
Power consumption
21 Watts
Weight
General
2.6 kg
Dimensions
430mm(W) x 240mm(D) x 49mm(H)
Operating temp.
+5°C to +35°C
Other conditions
Keep level when operating. Less than 75% operating humidity
Video
Composite Video : 1.0 V p-p at 75Ω load, sync negative
Audio
Max.Audio Input Level : 2Vrms
DV Input
IEEE 1394(4p) compatible jack
Input
PAL, SECAM - B/G, D/K, I
Receivable Channels
Analogue output jacks x 2
Audio
Optical/Coaxial digital audio output
Output
Composite Video : Video output jack x 1
Video
S-Video output x 1 (Y:1.0Vp-p, C:0.286Vp-p at 75Ω load)
Component output x 1 (Y: 1.0Vp-p, Pb: 0.70Vp-p, Pr: 0.70Vp-p at 75Ω load)
Picture Compression format
MPEG-II
Audio Compression format
Dolby Digital 2ch/256Kbps, MPEG-II
Recording
XP (about 8 Mbps), SP (about 4 Mbps), LP (about 2 Mbps),
Recording Quality
EP (about 1.2 Mbps or about 0.8 Mbps)
Audio Frequency Response
20 Hz ~ 20 kHz
For DVD discs, audio signals recorded at 96kHz sampling
Audio Output frequency are converted and output at 48kHz.
Disc Type
DVD
AUDIO CD(CD-DA)
Analogue Audio Output
48 / 96kHz
44.1kHz
Digital Audio Output
48kHz
44.1kHz
Additional Information
English -87
01004L-R130-XSG_83~87 2006.3.2 2:48 PM Page 88
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer
care centre.
Country
Customer Care Centre ☎
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
RUSSIA
UKRAINE
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
HONG KONG
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421
800-726-7864(SAMSUNG)
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-7267-864
1-800-100-5303
02 201 2418
844 000 844
38 322 887
09 693 79 554
08 25 08 65 65 (0,15€/Min)
01805 - 121213 (€ 0,12/Min)
06 40 985 985
199 153 153
02 261 03 710
0900 20 200 88 (€ 0.10/Min)
231 627 22
0 801 801 881
80 8 200 128
0850 123 989
902 10 11 30
08 585 367 87
0870 242 0303
8-800-200-0400
8-800-502-0000
1300 362 603
800-810-5858, 010- 6475 1880
2862 6001
3030 8282
1600 1100 11
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)
800SAMSUNG (7267864)
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
INDIA
Asia Pacific
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
Middle East & Africa
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/ur
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com.cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/mea
01004L-R130-XSG-ENG_Cover 3/28/06 12:29 PM Page 2
English
AK68-01004L-00
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬
DVD-R130
www.samsung.com/mea
AK68-01004L-00
R130-COVER.indd 1
English
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
3/28/2006 12:31:33 PM
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺰود ﺑﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻘﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻬﻴﺮة‪ .‬وﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺟﻪ اﻟﺪﺑﻮس‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺻﻬﻴﺮة ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ BS1362‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻟﻤﻘﺪرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰع اﻟﻐﻄﺎء )أو اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﻼح ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪ .‬اﻃﻠﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻨﻲ اﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺺ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻰ "اﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮة" داﺧﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻌ ّﺮض ﻟﺨﻄﺮ اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ أو‬
‫إﺻﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺮح‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺴﺪود ﻣﺜﻞ رف اﻟﻜﺘﺐ أو ﻣﺜﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﺮ اﻟﺬي ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ إﺣﺪاث ﺣﺮﻳﻖ أو ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ أو‬
‫اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ آﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﻼزر اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆدي اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻶﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮة اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز آﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﻼزر‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ أو اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ أو اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮاءات ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻸﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ اﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ وﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬اﻃﻠﺐ اﻹﺻﻼح ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻨﻲ اﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺺ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺋﻢ راﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻟﺸﻖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺪون ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أن اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﺰع‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﻊ وﺟﻪ اﻟﺪﺑﻮس ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ .‬وﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﻮزع‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﻟﻤﺨﺮج اﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ أو اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل اﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮج‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺔ أو اﺳﺘﺸﺮ اﻟﻤﻮزع ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎك ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﻃﺮح اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬وﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻫﻨﺎك ﺧﻄﺮ اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺜﻨﻰ ﺑﺪون ﻏﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن اﻵن ﻣﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻘﻮق‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﺮاف اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬وﻫﺬه اﻟﺮﺧﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪودة ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺠﺎري ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺣﻘﻮق ﻣﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﺮاض اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ اﻟﺮﺧﺼﺔ أي ﺟﻬﺎز ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﺮﺧﺼﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ أو اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺘﺮف ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬أو ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم أو اﻟـﺬي‬
‫ﺑﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ .‬وﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ اﻟﺮﺧﺼﺔ إﻻ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ و‪/‬أو ﺣﻞ اﻟﺸﻔﺮة ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﻌﺘﺮف‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬أو ‪ .ISO/IEC 13818-3‬وﻻ ﺣﻖ ﻣﻨﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺰاﻳﺎ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز أو وﻇﺎﺋﻔﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﺮف ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬أو ‪.ISO/IEC 13818-3‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮف اﻷرﺿﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺮف ﺑﺠﻮار رﻣﺰ اﻷرض أو اﻟﻤﻠﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫أو اﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ اﻷﺧﻀﺮ واﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:24 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 2‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫اﻗﺮأ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ أدﻧﺎه‪ .‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺎول اﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬اﻗﺮأ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮات‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬اﺗﺒﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٥‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ (٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﻘﻤﺎش ﻣﺠﻔﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٧‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ أي ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ورﻛﺐ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٨‬ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﺐ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺤﺮارة ﻣﺜﻞ أﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ واﻟﺪﻓﺎﻳﺎت‪ ،‬اﻟﻄﺒ ّﺎخ أو ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت( اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺮج اﻟﺤﺮارة‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٩‬ﻻ ﺗﻬﻤﻞ ﻫﺪف اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻄﺐ أو ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻷرﺿﻲ‪ .‬واﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻄﺐ ﻟﻪ دﺑﻮﺳﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ اﻷﻋﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬واﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷرﺿﻲ ﻟﻪ داﺣﺘﺎن ودﺑﻮس اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻷرﺿﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ .‬واﻟﺪﺑﻮس‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ واﻟﺪﺑﻮس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﺰود ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ .‬إذا ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻼﺋﻢ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻤﺰود ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻓﻨﻴﺎ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١٠‬اﺣﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪم أو‬
‫اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﻪ واﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ واﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺨﺮوﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١١‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‪/‬اﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١٢‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻜﺎرت‪ ،‬اﻟﻤﻨﻀﺪة‪ ،‬اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻴﻔﺔ أو اﻟﻄﺎوﻟﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ ،‬أو اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎع ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎرت‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺎرت واﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١٣‬اﻧﺰع ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻮاﺻﻒ واﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ أو ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻟﻤﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١٤‬اﻃﻠﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻨﻲ اﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت‪ .‬واﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ وﻗﻮع ﺿﺮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺑﺄي ﺻﻮرة‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻀﺮر ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ أو اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫وﺻﺐ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ أو ﺳﻘﻮط اﻷﺷﻴﺎء داﺧﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬واﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ أو اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪم ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪،‬‬
‫أو ﺳﻘﻮط اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت ﻟﺘﻨﺎول اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻷﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫إﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬وإﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺧﺪش‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص أو ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬وﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﺮر اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﺰﻫﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻤﻠﻮءة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء أو أي أﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮة‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺬ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻳﺪك ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أي ﺷﻲء ﻟﻴﺲ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت أوﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ واﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺣﺪث ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬اوﻗﻒ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ وﺷﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ زر ‪ ،STANDBY/ON‬أو اﻧﺰع ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻠﻪ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻘﺮص ﺛﻢ اوﻗﻒ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎه ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎرج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺰع ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻗﻖ اﻟﻘﻮام أو ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻘﻤﺎش ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎول اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻣﻦ اﻷﺷﻜﺎل‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ .‬إذا اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎدﻳﺎ‬
‫)ﻗﺮص ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎص(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺿﺮر‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟـﻲ ﻳﺠﺮي اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬و ‪DVD-R‬‬
‫• ّ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﻫﺬه اﻷﻗﺮاص ﺑﻤﺎدة ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺮص ‪) DVD-RAM/PD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.(LF-K200DCA1‬‬
‫وﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺎدة اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ أو‬
‫اﻷﻗﻤﺸﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪.DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي‪ ،‬ﻗﺮص ﺻﻮت ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫• اﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻐﺒﺎر أو اﻟﺒﻘﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﻘﻤﺎش ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺎول اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮع ﺑﻘﻠﻢ أو ﻗﻠﻢ رﺻﺎص‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺮﺷﺎش ﻟﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﺴﺠﻞ أو اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﻤﻀﺎدة‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮة ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ أو‬
‫ﻣﺮﻗﻖ اﻟﻘﻮام‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ اﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ أو اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ أو أﺛﺎر اﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﻤﻀﺎدة ﻟﻠﺨﺪش أو اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻗﺮاص ذات اﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎع ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻮق‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﻤﻠﺘﻮﻳﺔ أو اﻟﻤﺸﻘﻮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:29 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 3‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﺧﺬ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻀﺮر اﻟﻘﺮص ﻷن اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ وﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺟﺪا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬
‫• اﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎرد ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻧﻘﻠﺖ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﺠﺄة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎرد اﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎن داﻓﺊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﺪاوة ﻓﻲ أﺟﺰاء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ واﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت‬
‫وﻫﺬا ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪوث‬
‫ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ واﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪة ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص وﺣﺎول اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة‬
‫أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫• ﻗﺮص ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻪ ﺷﻤﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻟﻤﺪة ‪ ١٣٥‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬و ‪ ٨‬ﻟﻐﺎت ﻟﻠﺼﻮت و‪ ٣٢‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺰودا ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺻﻮرة ‪ MPEG-2‬وﺻﻮت دوﻟﺒﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮر ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻠﻢ اﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫واﻟﻮاﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺮاﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﺰوﺟﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ DVDR/-RW‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮل‬
‫اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ ‪.DVD-Video‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص أودﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻗﺮص أودﻳﻮ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑـ ‪.44.1kHz PCM Audio‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ أﻗﺮاص ‪ CD-R‬و‪ CD-RW‬ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ أودﻳﻮ ‪ .CD-DA‬وﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ أﻗﺮاص ‪ CD-R‬أو ‪ CD-RW‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺦ دام ‪CD-R/-RW‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﺮص ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﺑـ ‪ ٨٠) MB ٧٠٠‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎن‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ ٩٠) MB ٨٠٠‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ( أو اﻟﻘﺮص أﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪرة ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻵن اﻟﻘﺮص ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺄﺟﻞ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ أﻗﺮاص ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫اﻷداة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ إﺣﺮاﻗﻬﺎ‪ .‬وﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ CD-R/-RW‬ﻓﻲ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت واﻷﻗﺮاص‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ‪DVD-R/-RW، CD-R/-RW :‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.DivX ،.AVI ،.divx ،.avi :‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DivX 3.11 : MPEG4 Codec‬و‪ DivX 4.x‬و‪DivX 5.x‬‬
‫و‪DivX-Pro Xvid‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ QPEL :‬و‪GMC‬‬
‫• أرﺑﻌﺔ أﺷﻜﺎل ﻣﻦ ‪ MPG4 :CC‬و‪ mpg4‬و‪ DIV3‬و‪ divX3‬و‪DIVX‬‬
‫و‪ divX‬و‪ DX50‬و‪ MP43‬و‪ mp43‬و‪ XVID‬و‪xvid‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ “MP3” :‬و”‪“MPEG1 Audio Layer2‬‬
‫و”‪ “LPCM‬و”‪ “AC3‬و”‪ “DTS‬و”‪“MS ADPCM‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻮ ّﻓﺮ ‪s،.sub ،.srt ،.smi :‬‬
‫‪assass .ass ،.txt ،.psb‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-R‬واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪CD-R/-RW‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪MP3 CD-R/-RW‬‬
‫•‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ CD-R‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ISO9660‬‬
‫أو ‪ JOLIET‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫وﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "mp3"، ".MP3.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑـ ‪)VBR‬ﻧﺴﺒﺎت ﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Kbps ٣٢‬اﻟﻰ ‪ ،Kbps ٣٢٠‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪة ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Kbps ٥٦‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪.Kbps‬‬
‫وﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ و‪ ١٠٠‬إﺿﺒﺎرة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫‪JPEG CD-R/-RW‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "jpg"، ".JPG.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ و ‪ ١٠٠‬إﺿﺒﺎرة ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫أﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ‪ 3M‬ﺑﻜﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪.MOTION JPEG‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٤-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:30 PM‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮد أن ﻳﺘﻢ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ DVD-R‬ﻓﻲ ‪Video Mode‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ‪.DVD-Video‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص واﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص واﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ وﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮص ‪ ،DVD-R‬اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫وإذا ﺟﺮي اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص ‪ ،DVD-R‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺤﻮا أو‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ‪ DVD-R‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬وﻳﺠﺮي‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﺮص أو ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮات ﻛﺜﻴﺮة ﺟﺪا‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R‬اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫وﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺾ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﺮص وﺣﺎﻟﺞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-RW‬وإﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ و ‪.VR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻌﻲ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ و‬
‫‪ ،VR‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬا ﻳﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD-Video‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص ﻗﺒﻞ وﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء وﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﻤﺤﻮ واﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫إذا أردت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪ ،V‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫وﺧﺬ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻷن ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 4‬‬
‫• ‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ ﻫﺬا ﻫﻮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص‬‫‪ DVD-RW‬أو ﻗﺮص ‪ .DVD-R‬وﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻨﺪ إﺗﻤﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ أو ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ أﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة اﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن وﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺗﺨﺬ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻋﻮة ﺣﻖ ﺑﺮاءة اﻻﺧﺘﺮاع اﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ وﺣﻘﻮق‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻋﺘﻤﺎده ﻣﻦ ‪Macrovision Corporation‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺰل أو اﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻤﺤﺪودة‬
‫اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﺪم اﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Macrovision‬‬
‫‪.Corporation‬‬
‫واﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻗﺮاص ‪،Video-CD ،CD-I ،CD-G ،LD‬‬
‫‪ DVD-ROM ،CD-ROM‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت[‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪/MP3/CD-RW/CD-R/CD :‬‬
‫‪ .DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-Video/MPEG4/JPEG‬وﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺮص ‪ ،DVD-RW/DVD-R‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺗﻤﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﺎرغ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻷول ﻣﺮة‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ ﻫﺬا ﻫﻮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص‬‫ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪة واﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ واﻟﻤﺤﻮ‬
‫واﻟﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ وإﻋﺪاد ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ...‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺮص ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز‬‫دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ!‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ وأﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎع ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮض ﻛﻠﻤﺔ " ﻻ ﻗﺮص " أو " ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ "‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎن ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺮﻋﻲ أو ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺻﻮرة دي ﻓﻲ دي‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻗﺮاص ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻛﺎﻓﺔ أﻧﻮاع اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ أن ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻓﻲ اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ :‬راﺟﻊ " ﻗﻔﻞ)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ( ﻋﻨﻮان" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٦٧‬‬
‫• ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ‪ :‬راﺟﻊ "ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٩‬‬
‫✽ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫✽ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ دي ﻓﻲ دي‪،‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺸﺮ اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟـ ‪.DVD-R/DVD-RW‬‬
‫✽ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬اﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ إﺣﺪاث اﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪم اﻟﺤﺪود‪ ،‬اﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ أو‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﺪل أو اﻟﻀﺮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:30 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 5‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮت ‪٩١ ...........‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪٩١ ......................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪٢ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت أوﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٣..........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺴﻲ ﺧﺮوج ‪٠٢ ............................................ AV‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٣‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪ AV‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج رﻗﻤﻲ ‪٠٢ .............................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ‪ ،AV 2 IN‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪١٢ .................. DV‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬وﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل )‪،(STB‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت ﻟﺘﻨﺎول اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪٣ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي أو ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ‪٣ ......................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢ .............................................................. AV 2 IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎول اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٣ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ DV‬اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪١٢ ........... DV‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺾ اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺰاﻳﺎ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪٨ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺮاءة دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪٩ ............‬‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺒﻮة ‪١١ ...........................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‪١١ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺮاءات اﺳﺘﻌﺪادﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪١١ .....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪١١ .............................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪٣١ .........................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪٣١ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪٣١ .........................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪٤١ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪٥١ ........................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٢ .....‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٤ ..........................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻴﺪوي ‪٢٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٢٦ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪٢٧ ......................................... EP‬‬
‫إﺑﺪاع اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪٢٩ ........................................................ DivX (R‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷودﻳﻮ ‪٢٩ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷودﻳﻮ ‪٢٩ ........................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ‪٣٠ .............................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺮة اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪٦١ ............................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‪٣١ ...............................................‬‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪٧١ ...........................‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪٧١ ............‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ( ‪٨١ ............................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪-‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق ‪٨١ ...............................................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض )اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪٣١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض )اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪٣٢ .....................................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻹﺷﺮاف اﻷﺑﻮي ‪٣٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫إذا ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ ﻟﻚ ‪٣٣ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ‪٣٣ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ ‪٣٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٣‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٩١ ..........................‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:30 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 6‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٥ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل زر ‪) INFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت(‪٣٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫)اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص( ‪٣٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺻﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪٥٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص أودﻳﻮ‪٥٦ ................................................................. MP3/‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ )‪٥٦ ..................................... MP3 /(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ﺻﻮرة ‪٦٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٥ ............................................................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪٥٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪٦١ ............................................................. MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪٦٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان(‪٦٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪٣٧ .......................................................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ )وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ( ﻋﻨﻮان ‪٦٦ ....................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪٣٩ .......‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ( ﻋﻨﻮان ‪٦٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٤٠ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻋﻨﻮان ‪٦٧ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة )‪٤١ .................... (OTR‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮان ‪٦٨ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪٤٢ ..........................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم )ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض( ‪٧٠ ............................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ّ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺮن )ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪٤٣ ..........‬‬
‫إﺑﺪاع ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ‪٧٠ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ‪٤٣ ............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻮاد ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪٧١ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ‪٤٤ ...............................‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪٧٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ ‪٤٥ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪٧٣ ..............................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪٧٦ .....................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪٧٧ .........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪٤٦ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٧٨ ................................................................‬‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )دي ﻓﻲ دي ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪٤٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٧٨ .............................................................‬‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪٤٦ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٧٩ .......................................................................‬‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪٤٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻗﺮص‪٧٩ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص‪٤٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺎت اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ‪٨٠ ................................................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ‪٤٨ ...........................‬‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٨١ .........................................................................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪٤٨ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص)وﺿﻊ ‪٨٢ ........................................... (V/VR‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪٤٩ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎت ﺧﻄﻮة ﻓﺨﻄﻮة ‪٤٩ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪٤٩ .......................................................................‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﺮﻳﺮ ‪٥٠ ...................................................‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪٥٢ ....................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮى اﻟﺨﻠﻞ وإﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪٨٣ ...............................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪٨٧ ..................................................................‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ ‪٥٢ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮة ‪٥٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٥٣ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٧-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:31 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 7‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺰاﻳﺎ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ وﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص ‪.DVD-R/DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ وﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص ‪DVD-RW/‬‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ أﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮر ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص‬
‫‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ ٤٫٧‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬وﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﻌﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫وﻣﺪﺗﻪ‪ .‬ووﺿﻊ ‪ ٦) EP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت أو ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت( ﻳﺠﻌﻞ وﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﻃﻮل وﻗﺖ‪ ،‬وﻳﻮ ّﻓﺮ وﺿﻌﺎ ‪ LP‬و ‪ SP‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ وﺿﻊ ‪XP‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻮﺣﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ واﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪم اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎن‪ .‬واﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪ 10-bit 54-MHz DAC‬و ‪2D‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪم ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ وﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ Y/C‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻲ ‪ ١٩‬و ‪.(٣١~ ٣٠‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ووﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاﺣﺔ وﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬وﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺮص‬
‫‪ ،DVD-RW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬وإﻋﺪاد ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﺬا ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ‪MPE4‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮن ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.avi‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎدة ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ‪ DivX، DivX Certified‬واﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟـ‬
‫‪ ،DivXNetworks‬و‪ Inc‬وﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫إذا اﺧﺘﺮت وﺿﻊ ‪ ،FR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر ﻟﻠﻤﺪة اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺤﺮة‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٤٤‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺻﻮرة دي ﻓﻲ دي ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص‬
‫‪DVD-R/DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺻﻮر‬
‫دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻗﺮاص ‪.GB DVD-RW/DVD-R ٤٫٧‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ رﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-RW‬أو ‪ DVD-R‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻞ ‪) DV‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ IEEE 1394‬ذو ‪ ٤‬ﺳﻨﻮن‪ ٤/‬ﺳﻨﻮن(‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٨-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:31 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 8‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺮاءة دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز دي‬
‫ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﺮاءة دﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪١‬‬
‫اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬أو ‪ DVD-RW/DVD-R‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ وإﺗﻤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪RW‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.DVD-R‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻗﺮص ﻣﺪﻣﺞ )‪ CD-R‬أو ‪.(CD-RW‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫أﻗﺮاص اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪ CD-R/-RW‬أو‬
‫‪ DVD-R/-RW‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮر‪.‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪ CD-R/-RW‬أو ‪.DVD-R/-RW‬‬
‫‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪ CD-R/-RW‬أو ‪.DVD-R/-RW‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ أن وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ أي‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أو ﻳﻠﻐﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎت أو اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫زر ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫واﺣﺪة‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
‫واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫زر أي‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
‫أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻻﻃﻼح ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(٥-٢‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬إذا ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮى اﻟﺨﻠﻞ وإﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(٨٦ -٨٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪©2006 Samsung Electronics Co.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺤﻘﻮق ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ؛ ﻻ ﺟﺰء أو ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪه وﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺪون إذن ﻣﻜﺘﻮب ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﻟﻺﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺮص ﻣﻦ اﻷﻧﻮاع‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬إذا أردت ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻘﺮص أو‬
‫أردت ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺮص ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎدة‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪.DVD-RW‬‬
‫إذا أردت ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪون أي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺮص‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎدة اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪٢‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ .‬وﻫﺬا‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫‪) DVD-Video‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( أو ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪DVD-‬‬
‫‪) Video‬وﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬وﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮض رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬أم ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت دي ﻓﻲ‬
‫دي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺮص وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ اﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص ‪DVD-R‬‬
‫إن ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري‪ ،‬وﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ دﻋﻢ ‪Video‬‬
‫‪) Mode Recording‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ)‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﻼ وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬أو‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،DVD-RW‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ DVD-RW‬اﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫آﺧﺮ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪ .‬وﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ أن‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺮص ﺳﺘﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٩-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:31 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 9‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪٣‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎك ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎن ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﺎن ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﻒ ﻛﺒﻴﺎن‪) Once :‬ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة(‪) Daily ،‬ﻳﻮﻣ ًﻴﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) MO-SA‬اﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ – اﻟﺴﺒﺖ(‪) MO-FR ،‬اﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ – اﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) W-SA‬اﻷرﺑﻌﺎء – اﻟﺴﺒﺖ(‪ ،‬إﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪) XP :‬اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪) SP ،‬اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪) LP ،‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﻠﻲ( و‪EP‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪي( وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ ،FR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻋﺘﺒﺎر اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪٦‬‬
‫اﻹﺗﻤﺎم واﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت دي ﻓﻲ دي أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت دي ﻓﻲ دي أﺧﺮى‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮورة اﻹﺗﻤﺎم‪ .‬واﻛﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫أوﻻ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أن اﻹﺗﻤﺎم ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري ﻋﺎدة ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ وﺿﻊ ‪ ،VR‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻗﺮص ﺗﻢ إﺗﻤﺎﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص أوﻻ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﻌﺪ إﺗﻤﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺮص ‪DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص أوﻻ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﻌﺪ إﺗﻤﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪٤‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮة‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻮرا‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺘﻜ ّﻮن ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎة ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
‫واﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻮل‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻣﻮﺿﻊ إﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻔﺼﻮل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًَﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪Video‬‬
‫)اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮل اﻟﻔﺼﻞ )اﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻠﻴﻦ( وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺮص ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺮاص أﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺷﺮﻃﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ .‬وﻳﻮ ّﻓﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮة وﻣﻤﻜﻨﻮ ﻣﻊ أﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ وﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﻮ‪ ،‬اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬وإﻋﺎدة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ...‬اﻟﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺻﻨﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻘﺮص وﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪون ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٠-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:32 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 10‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮة اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﻮ ّﻓﺮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ‪ RF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ)ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(AAA‬‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺒﻮة‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬا‪ .‬وﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ اﻷزرار ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪،PROG / ،STANDBY/ON :‬‬
‫‪ VOL +/-‬أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪ ،‬زر ‪ ،TV MUTE‬زر ‪.INPUT SEL.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬زودﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺟﺮاءات اﺳﺘﻌﺪادﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫• اﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ادﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ .AAA‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪ +‬و ‪.(-‬‬
‫• اﻋﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ ‪ +‬و‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ )ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻓﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎذ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻣﺸﻌﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺑﻌﻮاﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻣﺼﺒﺎح ﻻﺻﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻃﺮح اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺣﻜﺎم اﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١١-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:32 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 11‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ إذا ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ أم ﻻ‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺷﻐﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫وﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ .٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬اﺑﻖ ﺿﺎﻏﻄﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STANDBY/ON‬وادﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫رﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ :‬إذا ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪،‬‬
‫اوﻗﻔﻪ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺖ اﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻵن‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫إذا وردت ﻋﺪة رﻣﻮز ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺟ ّﺮب ﻛﻼ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ دورﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﺪ واﺣﺪا ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫إذا اﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﺖ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫وإذا ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ زر ‪.TV‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪ STANDBY/ON‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن وإﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT SEL.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪ +) VOL‬أو ‪(-‬‬
‫‪ ) PROG‬أو ( ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻜﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت وﻋﻮدﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV MUTE‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪0-9‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮورﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎت‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﻐﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:33 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 12‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٧ ٨‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪STANDBY/ON .١‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وإﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪SEARCH/SKIP .٧‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ أو‬
‫اﻹرﺟﺎع اﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪AV 2 INPUT .٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪PLAY/PAUSE .٨‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺮص أو إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DV IN .٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪.DV‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪P.SCAN .٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص أو إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISC TRAY .٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪PROG ( ) .١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎن ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬وﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺸﻲء ﻣﻊ زر ‪ PROG‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN/CLOSE .٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص وإﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪REC .١١‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY .٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻌﺮض أﺣﻮال اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪...‬‬
‫اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪STOP .١٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .١‬اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪/‬اﻷﺣﻮال اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻗﺮص ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:34 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 13‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٩ ١٠‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪RF IN / RF OUT .١‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎن ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) .٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺐ اﻟﺼﻮت ذي ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل‬
‫ﺻﻮت رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺼﺮي‪.‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) .٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ذي ﻗﺎﺑﻂ دﺧﻮل ﺻﻮت‬
‫رﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك اﻟﻤﺤﻮر‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO OUT .٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪) VIDEO OUT .٥‬ﺻﻮرة ﺟﻴﺪة اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪) S-VIDEO OUT .٦‬ﺟﻮدة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﻓﻀﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻔﻮق‪.‬‬
‫‪) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT .٧‬أﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮرة ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ذي ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪AV 1 AUDIO IN .٨‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎن ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻠﻜﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪AV 1 VIDEO IN .٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪AV 1 S-VIDEO IN .١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﻔﻮق‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﺨﺮج إﺷﺎرة دي ﻓﻲ‬
‫دي‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٤-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:34 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪.١٣‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪.١٥‬‬
‫‪.١٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪.١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪.١٨‬‬
‫‪.١٩‬‬
‫‪.٢٠‬‬
‫‪.٢١‬‬
‫‪.٢٢‬‬
‫‪.٢٣‬‬
‫‪.٢٤‬‬
‫‪.٢٥‬‬
‫‪.٢٦‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪.٠١‬‬
‫‪.١١‬‬
‫‪.١٢‬‬
‫زر ‪) STANDBY/ON‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬إﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪TV/DVD‬‬
‫زرا ‪) Reverse/Forward Skip‬ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ /‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎم(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻟﺘﺠﺎوز ﻗﺮص ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ أو ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪.‬‬
‫زرا ‪) Reverse/Forward Step‬إﻃﺎر ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ /‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎم(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻃﺎر ﺑﺈﻃﺎر‪.‬‬
‫زرا ‪) Reverse/Forward Search‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ /‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎم(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ أو ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪) STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎف(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫زر ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ‪VOL‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪) AUDIO/TV MUTE‬ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز(‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪) .‬وﺿﻊ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫وﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ‪) Sound Mute‬ﻛﺎﺗﻢ ﺻﻮت(‪.‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ‪) TV‬اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن((‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻋﺪاد ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫( ‪)OK/DIRECTION‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ‪/‬اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎت(‬
‫أزرار ) ▲▼‬
‫زر ‪TITLE LIST/DISC MENU‬‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص(‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪View Recording‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت( ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Disc‬اﻟﻘﺮص(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢٧‬‬
‫‪.٢٨‬‬
‫‪.٢٩‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١٤‬‬
‫زر ‪) ANYKEY‬أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح(‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪) REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻓﻲ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪.DVD-RW/-R‬‬
‫زر ‪) REC MODE‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر إﻟﻰ ﻋﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(EP/LP/SP/XP‬‬
‫زر ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮار(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان أو ﻓﺼﻞ أو ﻣﺎدة ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ أو‬
‫ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪) OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ /‬إﻏﻼق(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ وإﻏﻼق درج اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﺮص ‪.DVD‬‬
‫زر ‪) PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص أو إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ إﻳﻘﺎ ًﻓﺎ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫أزرار ‪) PROG‬ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات ﺗﻢ إﻋﺪادﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ أزرار ‪) PROG‬ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ( اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪) RETURN‬ﻋﻮدة(‬
‫ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪PLAY LIST/TITLE MENU‬‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Title‬اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ( أو ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪CANCEL‬‬
‫زر )اﶈﺪد ‪ /‬اﳌﻮﻗﺖ( ‪MARKER/TIMER‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﻗﺖ ‪Timer‬‬
‫‪ Recording Mode‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫زر ‪) INFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت(‬
‫ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻋﺮض اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ أو ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪TV‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫زر ‪) .INPUT SEL‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹدﺧﺎل(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺷﺎرة اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫)دﺧﻞ ‪ AV‬أو ‪ PROG‬أو دﺧﻞ ‪(DV‬‬
‫زر ‪) ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:35 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 15‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺮة اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﺰء ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي‬
‫ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى وأوﺿﺎع‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪم‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺮة اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ّ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮل ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ‪ ،AV 2 IN‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪DV‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺮة اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪١٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪١٧ ..........................‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪١٧ ...........‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮت ‪١٩ ..........‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ‪ ،AV 2 IN‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪٢١ ................. DV‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:35 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻧﺰع ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن وﺻﻠﻪ اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي وﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﻮ ّﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬اﻷودﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﻴﺮ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎر(‪/‬ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺼﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INPUT SEL.‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪار‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎك ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻄﺮق ﻟﺨﺮوج إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬واﺧﺘﺮ واﺣﺪا ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ(‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٣‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫أوﺿﺎع ﺧﺮوج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ واﻟﺨﺮوج‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق وﻣﺨﺮج ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أن ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺰﻳﺪة ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪-‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق وﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻮاﻟﻲ‪ .‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق وﻣﺨﺮج ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ووﺿﻊ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪ ،‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫دﺧﻮل اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻘﺮار اﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫واﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎن واﻟﺼﻮرة اﻷوﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ )‪(576p‬‬
‫• ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻳﻌﺮف اﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ أن ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺷﻲء‬
‫اﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ ،‬وﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ‪ .576p‬وﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ أن اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻳﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮج " اﻟﻮﺿﻮﺣﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ"‪ .‬وإذا ﻛﺎن‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪك ﺳﺆال ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻮدﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪ ،576p‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺘﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫أو‬
‫أو‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮم وﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬا‬
‫ﺑﺈرﺳﺎل إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ‪) Audio/Video‬اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة إﺷﺎرة ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٧-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:35 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 17‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ(‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )أﺻﻔﺮ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ)أﺻﻔﺮ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ وﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )أﺻﻔﺮ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن )أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪.(AV‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ وﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫دﺧﻮل اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬اﻟﻤﺘﻔﻮق ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن )أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت‬
‫‪.(AV‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )أﺑﻴﺾ وأﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ وﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫)أﺻﻔﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن )أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪.(AV‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٠-١٩‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )أﺑﻴﺾ وأﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﺻﻮت ‪AV‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ وﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن )أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪.(AV‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫أﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٨-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:36 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 18‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٣‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮ ّﻓﺮ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺨﺮج‬
‫اﻟﻤﻜﻮن )‪ (PR، P8، Y‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ وﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﻮن )‪ (PR، P8، Y‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬و‪.٣١‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﺘﻊ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ واﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ واﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎك ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮق ﻟﺨﺮوج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬واﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮوج ‪AV‬‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٣‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪ AV‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺧﺮوج رﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )أﺑﻴﺾ وأﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺔل وﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن )أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪.(AV‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٩‬و‪(٢٠‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮع ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫و"‪ "Dolby‬واﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﺰوﺟﻲ ‪ D -‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫"‪ "DTS‬و "‪ "DTS Digital Out‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.DTS, Inc‬‬
‫أﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫أزرق‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬
‫أﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫أزرق‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫■‬
‫أﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻤﺮﻣﻮزة ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺎﺑﺴﻲ ﺧﺮوج ﻣﻜﻮن ‪ PR، P8، Y‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ‬
‫دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﻲ دﺧﻮل‬
‫اﻟﻤﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﻨﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻹﻋﺪاد ‪) Progressive‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪم( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼت اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫أﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪١٩-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:36 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 19‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺴﻲ ﺧﺮوج ‪AV‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪ AV‬دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ MPEG2 ،‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺮة ‪ DTS‬وﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫وﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺪوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ MPEG2 ،‬أو ﺻﻮت ‪ ،DTS‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎج اﻟﻰ‬
‫إﻋﺪاد وﺿﻌﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫)اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٩‬و‪(.٣٠‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻳﺴﺎر‬
‫وﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٣‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت‬
‫‪ AV‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج رﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫أو‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ)ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﺴﺮى(‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ)ﻳﺴﺎر(‬
‫أﻣﺎﻣﻲ)ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫وﺳﻄﻲ‬
‫أﻣﺎﻣﻲ)ﻳﺴﺎر(‬
‫ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٠-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:37 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 20‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ DV‬اﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪DV‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ‪،AV 2 IN‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪DV‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ‪ ،DV‬ﺻﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪ DV‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﻰ اﻷدوات‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى وﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻤﺼﺎدر اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ وﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬وﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل )‪،(STB‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي أو ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪.AV 2 IN‬‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ٢‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ DV‬اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻮل ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬وﺟﻪاز‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل )‪ ،(STB‬ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي أو‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪.AV 2 IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ أو أداة ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ AV 2 IN‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮل )ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،STB ،‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي أو ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم زر‬
‫‪ INPUT SEL.‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫أﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪STB‬‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪VCR‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫أﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫أﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ AV 2 IN‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم زر ‪INPUT SEL.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢١-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:38 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 21‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ أو ﻋﺪم‬
‫ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺢ واﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٢٢ .......‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٤ ..........................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻴﺪوي ‪٢٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٢٦ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪٢٧ ..........................................EP‬‬
‫إﺑﺪاع اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٨ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪٢٩........................................................ DivX (R‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷودﻳﻮ‪٢٩.....................................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻤﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ‪٣٠ .............................................‬‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻤﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ‪٣١ ..............................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض )اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪٣١ ..................................‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻹﺷﺮاف اﻷﺑﻮي ‪٣٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫زر ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫أزرار ▲ ‪/ ،▼ /‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫زر ‪OK‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫زر ‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬه اﻷزرار ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ▲ ‪ / ، ▼ /‬ﻟﻠﺪوران ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫اي وﺿﻌﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة‬
‫اﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:38 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 22‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪأ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Auto channel memory‬‬
‫‪17%‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻋﺪاد ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻷول ﻣﺮة‪ .‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫واﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ .‬وﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﻮﺷﺮ "‪ "Auto‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة ﺟﻬﺎز دي‬
‫ﻓﻲ دي‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Auto Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪2006‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧١‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺮام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬وﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻜﺎرت‪(.‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪JAN‬‬
‫‪SUN‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Auto Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Language Set‬‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫‪Deutsch‬‬
‫‪Español‬‬
‫‪Italiano‬‬
‫‪Nederlands‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎن ‪ :‬ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫زر ‪ ،OK‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮان‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎن ‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‪ ،‬اﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮام أزرار ▲▼ أو أزرار‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ .‬واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ OK‬أو اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺜﻮان ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Auto Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Auto setup will be started.‬‬
‫‪Check antenna and TV cable connection.‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻵن‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟـ " اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬إذا أردت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮه ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻴﺪوي " ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Auto Setup‬اﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ‪) PROG‬اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( )‬
‫آن واﺣﺪة ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮان ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻗﺮص ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:39 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 23‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﺤﺘﺎج اﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮام اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﻮاﻟﻒ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ أو اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﻤﺎ وﺻﻠﺖ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫دﺧﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻷوﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Clock Set‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺮم أزرار ▲▼‬
‫أو اﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮا‪ .‬وﻳﻌﺮض ﻳﻮم اﻷﺳﺒﻮع ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫زري ▲▼‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Install‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Auto Setup‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Manual Setup‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪2006‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪JAN‬‬
‫‪SUN‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ،OK‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ،OK‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٤-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:40 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 24‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻴﺪوي‬
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Auto Setup ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬.‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ‬
" .‫[ ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج‬MENU] ‫ و‬،‫[ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‬OK]
DVD-Recorder
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺎوزﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬.‫ وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻗﻨﺎة ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬.‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬MENU ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‬/‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
DVD-Recorder
١
Programme
Scheduled Record List
Install
No Disc
Programme
Auto Setup
►
Setup
Manual Setup
►
Your data will be lost.
Press [OK] to continue, [MENU] to exit.
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
.‫ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
Programme
.MENU ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫إذا أردت اﻟﺨﺮوج‬
No Disc
►
٤
٥
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
Setup
Auto channel memory
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
17%
Stop
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Setup ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
٢
.‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
Setup
.‫ ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
No Disc
Programme
System
►
Setup
Clock Set
►
Language
►
Audio
►
Video
►
Parental Control
►
Install
MOVE
OK
٦
►
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Install ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
٣
Install
No Disc
Programme
Auto Setup
►
Setup
Manual Setup
►
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
٢٥-‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 25
3/28/2006 12:23:41 PM
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Manual Setup‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪Manual Setup‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪----‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪---‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪) PR‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ أو ﻣﺤﻮﻫﺎ أو ﺗﺒﺎدﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ‪ Edit‬أو ‪ Delete‬أو ‪ Swap‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‬
‫▲▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫واﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻠ ًﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Manual Setup‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Swap‬‬
‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪----‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪---‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ‪ : Edit‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪) PR‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ ،(MFT ،Name ،CH‬ﺣﺪد ‪ ،Done‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪PR‬‬
‫► ‪◄1‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪---‬‬‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪--- --‬‬‫‪MFT‬‬
‫‪Done‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) CH‬اﻟﻘﻨﺎة( ‪ :‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام زري‬‫ ‪) Name‬اﻻﺳﻢ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮض اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬‫اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺒﺚ‪ .‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار ▲▼‬
‫ ‪ : MFT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆاﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﺑﺼﻮرة أﻓﻀﻞ‬‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام زري‬
‫• ‪ : Delete‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Swap‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺎدل اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎد‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‪ ،‬إذا أردت ﺗﺒﺎدل ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻲ‬
‫‪ PR2‬و ‪ ،PR5‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺘﺒﺎدل ﻟـ ‪ ،PR2‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪OK‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪.PR5‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Language‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: Original‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: Automatic‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: English‬‬
‫‪Disc Menu‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪On-Screen Menu : English‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪DivX Subtitle‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪: Western‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:42 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 26‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر واﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻌﺔ أوﺿﺎع اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫زر ‪ REC MODE‬ﺗﻜﺮارا‪ .‬ووﺿﻊ ‪ EP‬ﻫﻮ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻌﺔ أوﺿﺎع‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ .(XP، SP، LP، EP‬وﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪)EP‬اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪي(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬أو ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪On-Screen Menu‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪DivX Subtitle‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫√▲‬
‫√‬
‫√‬
‫√‬
‫√‬
‫▼‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪: Original‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪: Automatic‬‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫‪: Deutsch‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪: Español‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Italiano‬‬
‫‪Western‬‬
‫‪Nederlands‬‬
‫‪Korean‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Disc Menu‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ RETURN‬أو زر ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻓﻘﻂ إذا ﺗﻮﻓﺮت ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺨﻄﻮط‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔإذا‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻌﻨﻰ ذﻟﻚ أن اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪) Audio‬ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Subtitle‬ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺔ( ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disc Menu‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص( ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪) On-Screen Menu‬ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﺠﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪) DivX Subtitle‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪ : :(DivX‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﻓﺮﻳﻜﺎﻧﺰ واﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ واﻟﻜﺘﺎﻻﻧﻴﺔ واﻟﺪاﻧﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫واﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ واﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ واﻟﻔﺎروﺳﻴﺔ واﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Western‬واﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ واﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﻷﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ واﻹﻧﺪوﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫واﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ واﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ واﻟﻨﻴﺮوﻳﺠﻴﺔ واﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫واﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﻟﺴﻮاﺣﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ واﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﻟﻜﺮواﺗﻴﺔ واﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Central‬واﻟﻤﺠﺮﻳﺔ واﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ واﻟﺮوﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫)اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ( واﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻜﻴﺔ واﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Greek‬اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ واﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ واﻷزﻳﺮﻳﺔ واﻟﺒﻴﻼروﺳﻴﺔ واﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Cyrillic‬واﻟﻜﺎزاﺧﻴﺔ واﻟﻤﻘﺪوﻧﻴﺔ واﻟﺮوﺳﻴﺔ واﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫واﻟﺘﺘﺎرﻳﺔ واﻷوﻛﺮاﻧﻴﺔ واﻷوزﺑﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪EP‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،System‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: 6 Hours‬‬
‫‪EP Mode Time‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: Off‬‬
‫‪Chapter Creator‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،EP Mode Time‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪6 Hours‬‬
‫‪6: Hours‬‬
‫‪EP Mode Time‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪8Off‬‬
‫‪Hours‬‬
‫‪Chapter Creator‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٧-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:43 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 27‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫إﺑﺪاع اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-Video‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Titles‬ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ( و‪) Chapters‬ﻓﺼﻮل(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪)Title‬ﻋﻨﻮان( واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ‪) Title‬ﻋﻨﻮان(‬
‫إﻟﻰ ‪) Chapters‬ﻓﺼﻮل(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ‪(V‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ On‬أو ‪ ،Off‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف(‪ :‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )إﺑﺪاع‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )إﺑﺪاع‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪) REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٧‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪“Do you want to create the‬‬
‫”?‪) chapter menu after this recording‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺼﻮل ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ؟(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Do you want to create the chapter menu‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(V‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫►‬
‫?‪after this recording‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(V‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪Disc Manager Clock Set‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Yes‬واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺑﺪاع ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬وﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﺪة ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪XP‬‬
‫و وﺿﻊ ‪ SP‬وﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ LP‬ووﺿﻊ ‪.EP‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻔﺼﻮل اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬اﺗﻢ اﻟﻘﺮص )راج‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٨١‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.DISC MENU‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STOP‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪1/1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،System‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(V‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: 6 Hours‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: Off‬‬
‫‪EP Mode Time‬‬
‫‪Next‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Previous‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager Chapter Creator‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪،Chapter Creator‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﺑﺪاع اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ أو ﻋﻨﺪ إﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD-R‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(V‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: 6 Hours‬‬
‫√‬
‫‪: Off‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪EP Mode Time‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager Chapter Creator‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٨-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:45 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 28‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪DivX(R‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﺬا ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪. DivX (R‬‬
‫وﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪ ،‬زر ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪.www.divx.com/vod‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷودﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Audio‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻷودﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: PCM‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: Off‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Dynamic Compression : On‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪: On‬‬
‫‪Digital Output‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ RETURN‬أو زر ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺨﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮت دوﻟﺒﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ و ‪ MPEG-2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮاء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺨﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ أو ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮت أو ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺿﺠﻴﺠﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪)Off .١‬إﻳﻘﺎف( ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮج إﺷﺎرة ‪.DTS‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ‪AV‬‬
‫أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪ AV‬أداة ﺣﻞ ﺷﻔﺮة ‪.DTS‬‬
‫‪)On .٢‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﺗﺨﺮج ‪ DTS Bitstream‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮق اﻟﻤﺨﺮج‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت ‪.DTS‬‬
‫واﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺎن ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫‪) AV‬أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪ (AV‬أداة ﺣﻞ ﺷﻔﺮة ‪.DTS‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪: On‬‬
‫‪) Digital Output‬اﻟﻤﺨﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪ : PCM .١‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺷﻔﺮة إﺷﺎرات دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )أو ‪ .(MPEG-2‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )أو ‪ ،(MPEG-2‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮل‬
‫اﻟﻤﺨﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﻴﺮو ‪.PCM‬‬
‫‪ : Bitstream .٢‬ﻳﺨﺮج ﺻﻮت دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )أو ‪(MPEG-2‬‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮت ‪ .bitstream‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﺨﺮج ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎن ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ‪ AV‬أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت ‪ AV‬أداة‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺷﻔﺮة دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ)أو ‪.(MPEG-2‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷودﻳﻮ‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Dynamic Compression : On‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: Bitstream‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد أداة اﻷودﻳﻮ وﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻷودﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: PCM‬‬
‫‪Programme Digital Output‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،DTS‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج ﺻﻮت ‪.AV‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٩-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:47 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 29‬‬
‫‪) Dynamic Compression‬اﻟﺘﺸﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ وﺟﺪ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز إﺷﺎرة ﺻﻮت دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On .١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺼﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫أو ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻘﻠﻴﺎ وﻣﻨﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺪراﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮه أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻼزم‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off .٢‬إﻳﻘﺎف( ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﺪى‬
‫اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ‪ NICAM‬إﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ أﻧﻮاع‪NICAM Stereo .‬‬
‫)اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( و ‪) NICAM Mono‬أﺣﺎدي( و‪) Bilingual‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺑﺚ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻐﺔ أﺧﺮى( ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ‪ NICAM‬دو ًﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺚ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت اﻷﺣﺎدي وﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ NICAM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( أو ‪) Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف(‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫إذا و ّﻓﺮ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ P.SCAN‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ P.SCAN‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻷﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪“Press [Yes] to confirm‬‬
‫”]‪Progressive scan mode. Otherwise press [No‬‬
‫)وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ‪ [Yes‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪوﺿﻊ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﻘﺪ ّﻣﻲ ‪ .‬وإﻻ‪،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪([No‬‬
‫‪ : On .١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪ : Off .٢‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﺣﺎدي اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ وذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺚ‬
‫‪ NICAM‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻮه ﺻﻮت اﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮوف‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪Press [Yes] to confirm Progressive scan mode.‬‬
‫]‪Otherwise press [No‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪) Progressive ٣‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪم( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Yes‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن(‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ P.SCAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﻳﻮ ّﻓﺮ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫وﻳﻌﺮض ﻻ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻹﻋﺪاد ‪) Progressive‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪم( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼت اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪) P.SCAN‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض‬
‫اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم( ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻮن‬
‫وﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٠-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:48 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 30‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ P.SCAN‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻷﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪“Press [Yes] to confirm Interlace‬‬
‫”]‪) scan mode. Otherwise press [No‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Yes‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪوﺿﻊ اﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﻘﺪ ّﻣﻲ‪ .‬وإﻻ‪،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪([No‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫)اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺪاد وﺿﻌﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Press [Yes] to confirm Interlace scan mode.‬‬
‫]‪Otherwise press [No‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Yes‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن(‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪) P.SCAN‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض‬
‫اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم( ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ وﺿﻊ ‪) Progressive‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪم(‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم‬
‫اﻟﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ ‪) Progressive‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪم(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج‬
‫ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ ‪) Progressive‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪم(‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) P.SCAN‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫اﻧﻄﻔﺎء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ PS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪) Interlace ٣‬ﻣﺘﺪاﺧﻞ( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Video‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪TV Aspect‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪3D Noise Reduction : Off‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪DivX(R) Registration‬‬
‫‪: 16:9 Wide‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪TV Aspect‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪3D Noise Reduction :4:3‬‬
‫‪OffPan-Scan‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪DivX(R) Registration 16:9 Wide‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪:4:3‬‬
‫‪4:3LetterBox‬‬
‫‪Letter Box‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣١-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:49 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 31‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ RETURN‬أو زر ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض)اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬وﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻹﺷﺮاف اﻷﺑﻮي‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻹﺷﺮاف اﻷﺑﻮي ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪك ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫أﺷﺮﻃﺔ دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ أﺳﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫وﻫﻨﺎك ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪) TV Aspect‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن(‬
‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج اﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫►‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﻋﺪم ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪: 4:3 LetterBox‬‬
‫‪Letter Box‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪DivX(R) Registration 16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Programme TV Aspect‬‬
‫‪3D Noise Reduction : 4:3‬‬
‫‪Off Pan-Scan‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ‪ : LetterBox 4:3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﺷﺎﺷﺔ دي ﻓﻲ‬
‫دي ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪ 16 : 9‬ﻛﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫أن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪.4 : 3‬‬
‫وﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎن اﻟﺴﻮداء ﻓﻲ اﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫واﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪: Pan-Scan 4:3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪي ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.16 : 9‬‬
‫)وﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﻴﺴﺎر واﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪(.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Wide 16:9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﺻﻮرة ‪ 16 : 9‬اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3D Noise Reduction‬‬
‫)ﺧﻔﺾ اﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻲار ‪ ،Setup‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Install‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪،Parental Control‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “Create the password‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور(‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪: 16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Programme TV Aspect‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪DivX(R) Registration On‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪3D Noise Reduction :Off‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Create the password‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪NUMBER‬‬
‫‪0~9‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪم ﺻﻮرة أوﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺧﻔﺾ اﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‬
‫• ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ّ :‬‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف( ‪ :‬ﻋﺎدي‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:50 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 32‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ادﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬أرﻗﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار‬
‫أرﻗﺎم ‪ ٩ - ٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ " ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬وادﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Rating Level‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Confirm the password‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: On‬‬
‫‪Password‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪: Level 1 Kids‬‬
‫‪Rating Level‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Change Password‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪NUMBER‬‬
‫‪0~9‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Password‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪ffOff‬‬
‫‪Password‬‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Password‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Rating Level‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪:On‬‬
‫‪Level 8 Adults‬‬
‫‪:Level‬‬
‫‪Level71 Kids‬‬
‫‪Level 6‬‬
‫‪Change Password Level 5‬‬
‫‪Level 4‬‬
‫‪Level 3‬‬
‫‪Level 2‬‬
‫‪Level 1 Kids‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ On‬أو ‪ ،Off‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ RETURN‬أو زر ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زﻳﺮ ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻳﻤﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‪ ،‬إذا اﺧﺘﺮت ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ‪ ،٦‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ ‪ ٧‬و ‪ .٨‬واﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻰ أن اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ ﻟﻚ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ‪) PROG‬اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫آن واﺣﺪ‬
‫‪)٢‬‬
‫( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫اﺧﺮج اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮان ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻗﺮص ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻮد ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻹﻋﺪادات إﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ذﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:51 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 33‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ‬
.Change Password ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
DVD-Recorder
١
Parental Control
No Disc
Programme
Password
: On
►
Setup
Rating Level
: Level 1 Kids
►
Change Password
MOVE
OK
►
RETURN
EXIT
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ادﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬
.‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
DVD-Recorder
٢
‫إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
Change Password
No Disc
Programme
Setup
0~9
NUMBER
Enter the password
OK
RETURN
EXIT
- ٠ ‫ أرﻗﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار‬٤ ‫ادﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
.‫ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬٩
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ " ﻋﻠﻰ‬
.‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
DVD-Recorder
٣
Change Password
No Disc
Programme
Setup
0~9
NUMBER
Confirm the password
OK
RETURN
EXIT
.‫ إذا ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ‬٣٣ ‫راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
■
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
٣٤-‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 34
3/28/2006 12:23:53 PM
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﺰء ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ ﻃﺮق ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ .‬وﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻗﺮأ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ واﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮع‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫• أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-RWs‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎدة اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-Rs‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎدة اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ وﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫أﻧﻮاع‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪V‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪V‬‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي‬
‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪٣٧ ......................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪه ‪٣٩ ......‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٤٠ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة )‪٤١ ................... (OTR‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪٤٢ .........................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺮن )ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪٤٣ ........‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ‪٤٤ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ‪٤٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ أﺧﺮى‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫أداة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻹﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻹﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ ﻫﺬا ﻳﻐﻠﻖ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R/-RW‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ إﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺪم اﻹﺗﻤﺎم‬
‫ ﻫﺬا ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص ‪DVD-‬‬‫‪ RW‬اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ اﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑــ ‪)DAO‬ﻗﺮص ﻣﺮة‬‫واﺣﺪة( ﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺗﻤﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫إﺗﻤﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪم إﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD-R‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:53 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 35‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮا ﻷن اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬اﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ أﻧﺴﺐ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻠﻚ؛ ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DVD-RW‬ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص ﻓﺎرغ ﻷول ﻣﺮة‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”?‪“Uninitialized Disc Do you want to initialize this disc‬‬
‫)ﻗﺮص ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص؟(‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Yes‬ﻳﺠﺮي ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪.VR‬‬
‫‪Uninitialized Disc‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﺮن(‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫إذا أردت اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬أو وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺮص ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٩‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Disc Name :‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮه ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺮورة‬
‫ﺗﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬اﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤٨٠‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪Mbps ٨ - ٠٫٨‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺬي ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫►‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪Mbps ١٫٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪Mbps ٠٫٨‬‬
‫‪Channal‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Choose‬‬
‫‪the recording format for DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪Langguage‬‬
‫‪DVD-V‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮه ﻋﻨﺪ أن ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪XP‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ( اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ﻧﻤﻮذﺟﻲ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮه ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺮورة‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﻠﻲ(‬
‫‪EP‬‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪي(‬
‫?‪Do you want to initialize this disc‬‬
‫وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫درﺟﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪Mbps ٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪Mbps ٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪Mbps ٢‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪DVD-VR‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪You cannot record copy protected movie.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص‪ :DVD-R‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫وﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪R-/‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻨﻊ اﻟﻔﺼﻮل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪ DVD-RW/DVD-R‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﻣﺒﺪع‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬وﻣﺪة اﻟﻔﺼﻞ )اﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻠﻴﻦ( ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ )ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان(‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﻘﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﻮل‬
‫ﻛﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان واﻟﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ...‬اﻟﺦ(‬
‫• ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﺪة‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ واﺣﺪا ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻌﺔ أوﺿﺎع اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪ REC MODE‬ﺗﻜﺮارا أﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﻮن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎدة ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬وﻓﻲ‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪ ،FR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬وﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ أوﺿﺎع‬
‫‪ LP، SP، XP‬و‪ EP‬وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﺮ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﺪﻳﻪ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ أﻧﻮاع اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺜﻼث اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮة واﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬إذا أردت ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮة‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ CPRM‬ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪.VR‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪CPRM‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮة‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*O‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع "اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮة"‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪(CPRM‬‬‫‪ CPRM‬ﻫﻮ اﻵﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬وﻫﺬه ﻣﺘﻮ ّﻓﺮة ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة دي ﻓﻲ‬
‫دي اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ وﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ أﺟﻬﺰة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮة‪ .‬وﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻓﺎرغ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ رﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ وﺳﻴﻠﺔ ‪-٦٤‬ﺑﺖ وﺣﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻔﻮر ﻓﻲ ‪ .BCA‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺸﻔﺮة ‪-٥٦ C2‬ﺑﺖ )‪ (Cryptomeria‬اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وأﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ BCA‬وﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺷﻔﺮة ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬وإذا ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ أو ﻳﺤﺪث‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻴﻪ وﻻ ﻳﺠﺮي ﺣﻞ ﺷﻔﺮة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:54 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 36‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل زر ‪) INFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ وﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ووﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص وﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻘﺮص ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫واﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام )اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ أﻗﺮاص ‪،DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬وﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫واﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "‪ "LOAD‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺄل‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﺮص أم ﻻ أوﻻ‪ .‬واﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) .OK‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٣٦‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.INFO‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬وﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص أو‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪02:12 SP‬‬
‫‪Not Protected‬‬
‫]‪PR 11 [DUAL L‬‬
‫‪Total Title‬‬
‫‪Total Playlist‬‬
‫‪Recordable Time‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫‪Screen‬‬
‫‪JAN 01 2006 SUN‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫‪Disc‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Disc Name‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Uninitialized Disc‬‬
‫?‪Do you want to initialize this disc‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ :‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮع ﻋﺪد اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ :‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮع ﻋﺪد ﻻﺋﺤﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬أﻃﻮل وﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ أوﺿﺎع اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ(‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ :‬اﻟﻴﻮم واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ‪ PROG ( /‬أو أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‬
‫) ~ ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REC MODE‬ﺗﻜﺮارا‪) ،‬أو اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ،REC MODE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼(‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ)اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫➞ ‪XP ➞ EP ➞ LP ➞ SP‬‬
‫)‪SP (02:12‬‬
‫‪Record Mode‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٧-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:55 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 37‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.REC‬‬
‫وﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪأ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻣﺰ ) ( ‪) REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫‪Recording : PR 1 NICAM DUAL L‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﻗﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ واﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎذﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺘﻲ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬وﺗﺒﺎع ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺪون‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R‬اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ،INFO‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪Disc‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Disc Name‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪02:12 SP‬‬
‫‪Not Protected‬‬
‫]‪PR 1 [ DUAL L‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪Total Title‬‬
‫‪Total Playlist‬‬
‫‪Recordable Time‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫‪Screen‬‬
‫‪JAN 01 2006 SUN‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Recording Info‬‬
‫‪JAN/01/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪Recording Title‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪Created Time‬‬
‫‪JAN/01/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪Recording Time 00:00:07‬‬
‫‪JAN 01 2006 SUN‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ STOP‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻗﺮاص ‪ ،DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫’‪‘Updating the disc information. Please wait for a moment.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺠﺮي ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬واﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻀﻠﻚ( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٨-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:56 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 38‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮي ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ) ‪PROG ( /‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻘﺮص ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫واﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬وﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫واﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "‪ "LOAD‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺄل‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﺮص أم ﻻ أوﻻ‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.REC‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INPUT SEL.‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺪﺧﻮل‬
‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻋﻤﻠﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻋﺎدي ‪DV AV2 AV1 PR‬‬
‫إذا وﺻﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪ INPUT SEL.‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) .DV‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﻗﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ واﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎذﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺘﻲ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬وﺗﺒﺎع ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺪون‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R‬اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫وﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ STOP‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻗﺮاص ‪ ،DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫’‪‘Updating the disc information. Please wait for a moment.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺠﺮي ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬واﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻀﻠﻚ( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REC MODE‬ﺗﻜﺮار )أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫زر ‪ ،REC MODE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ)اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ ‪SP LP EP XP‬‬
‫)‪SP (02:12‬‬
‫‪Record Mode‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣٩-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:57 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 39‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.(DV) IEEE1394‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻘﺮص ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫واﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬وﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫واﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻛﻠﻤﺔ " ‪ "LOAD‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺄل‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﺮص أم ﻻ أوﻻ‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REC MODE‬ﺗﻜﺮار )أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫زر ‪ ،REC MODE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ)اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ واﻟﻌﺜﻮر ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫أﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ) ( ﻓﻲ أﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪.OK‬‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪) REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺰر‬
‫‪) REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ STOP‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻗﺮاص ‪ ،DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫’‪‘Updating the disc information. Please wait for a moment.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺠﺮي ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬واﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻀﻠﻚ( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ ‪SP LP EP XP‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪Record Mode‬‬
‫)‪SP (02:12‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﻗﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ واﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎذﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺘﻲ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬وﺗﺒﺎع ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺪون‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-R‬اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ ،DV‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬
‫أو ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INPUT SEL.‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.DV‬‬
‫إذا ﺿﺒﻄﺖ اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،DV‬ﺗﻀﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫أﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DV‬‬
‫‪The DV device is connected.‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٤٠-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:58 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 40‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫واﺣﺪة )‪(OTR‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺤﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INFO‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺰاﻳﺪة ﻣﻌﺪة‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫إذا أردت ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻨﺎة ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫) ‪ PROG ( /‬أو أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻤﺮاد‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫إذا أردت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮل‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INPUT SEL.‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ )‪ AV 2، AV 1‬أو ‪.(DV‬‬
‫• اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ‪ ١ :‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REC‬ﺗﻜﺮار ﻟﻀﺒﻂ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣‬اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REC‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ ... 9:00 5:00 ... 4:00 1:00 0:30‬ﻋﺎدي‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪Total Title‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪Total Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Recordable Time 02:12 SP‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫‪Not Protected‬‬
‫‪Screen‬‬
‫]‪PR 1 [ DUAL L‬‬
‫‪JAN 01 2006 SUN‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Recording Info‬‬
‫‪JAN/01/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪Recording Title 16‬‬
‫‪Created Time‬‬
‫‪JAN/01/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪Recording Time 00:00:07‬‬
‫‪JAN 01 2006 SUN‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪“.Press STOP button once more to cancel Timer Record‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎﻓﻤﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪Timer Record‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻋﺪاد اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻨﺎزﻟﻲ ﻛﻞ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺪ ًءا‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 9:00‬إﻟﻰ ‪ ،00:00‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Disc Name‬‬
‫‪Press STOP button once more‬‬
‫‪to cancel Timer Record.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٤١-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:23:59 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 41‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ)إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ TIMER‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Programme‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ OK‬أو اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻣﻸ اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻺدﺧﺎل ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار اﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫وأزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫▲▼‪ : ٩ - ٠ ،‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻤﺼﺪر ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﺪر دﺧﻮل اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ AV 1‬أو ‪ ،(AV 2‬أو ﻗﻨﻮات‬
‫اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻼل ﺷﻬﺮ واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻮم اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Daily‬‬
‫‪01 SUN‬‬
‫‪MO-SA‬‬
‫‪02 MON‬‬
‫‪MO-FR‬‬
‫‪03 TUE‬‬
‫‪MO-SA‬‬
‫‪04 WED‬‬
‫‪W-SU‬‬
‫‪31 TUE‬‬
‫• وﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺪء‪/‬اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ :‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺪء ووﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ)وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪:‬‬
‫ ‪) FR‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺮن(‪ :‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ ،FR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ أﻛﺜﺮ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻃﻮل ﻓﺘﺮة‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ واﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻷوﺿﺎع ‪ XP‬و‪ SP‬و‪ LP‬و‪ .EP‬وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) XP‬اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪ :‬اﺧﺘﺮه ﻋﻨﺪ أن ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪).‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ ‪) SP‬اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪ :‬اﺧﺘﺮع ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫ ‪ LP‬اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ(‪:‬اﺧﺘﺮه ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺮورة ﺗﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬‫وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ).‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت(‬
‫ ‪) EP‬اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ(‪ :‬اﺧﺘﺮه ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺮورة ﺗﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫اﻷﻛﺜﺮ‪) .‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت أو ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﻬﺪا ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫‪Current Time 12:05‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Start End Speed‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪No. Source‬‬
‫‪No. 01‬‬
‫‪Speed‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪Source‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪14:05‬‬
‫‪12:05‬‬
‫‪01 SUN‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪Available Time 00:48 SP‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ EP‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص ‪DVD-RW(V)/‬‬
‫‪ ،-R‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪة ‪ ٦‬أو ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎت ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻷن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻈﺎم ‪VBR ENCODING‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ درﺟﺎت ﺑﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‪ ،‬إذا‬
‫ﺳﺠﻠﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ذا ﺣﺮﻛﺎت ﻛﺜﻴﺮة‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم درﺟﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺑﺖ أﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٤٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:24:00 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 42‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫إذا ﻳﺘﺪاﺧﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ أوﻻ‪ .‬وإذا ﺿﺒﻄﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻷول ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫وﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻛﻼ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻈﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ " :‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻊ ‪ ." ١‬وﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻰ أن اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻷول ﻟﻪ اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬وﺑﻌﺪ اﻛﺘﻤﺎل‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻷول‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﺑﺪون ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ RETURN‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ TIMER‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫اوﻗﻒ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﻫﺬا ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Programme‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ OK‬أو اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫▲▼‬
‫‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻮاد اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ واﻟﻤﺤﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Current Time 12:27‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫►‪Edit‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺮن‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫وﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ أوﻗﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أو ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮن دﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ وﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟـ ‪ ١٢‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Speed‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪14:07‬‬
‫‪14:08‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪13:07‬‬
‫‪12:08‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪01 SUN‬‬
‫‪02 MON‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪No. Source‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ ،FR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬وﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ أوﺿﺎع‬
‫‪ LP، SP، XP‬و‪ EP‬ﻛﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ‪ FR‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺸﻲء ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ ،٣‬اﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ ‪.FR‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٤٢‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٤٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:24:01 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 43‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Edit‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻮاد اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪل اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫راﺟﻊ اﻟﺠﺰء "ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ" ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻣﻮاد إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮه‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪OK‬‬
‫أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻮاد اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ واﻟﻤﺤﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Current Time 12:27‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫‪Current Time 12:27‬‬
‫‪Speed Edit‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪No. Source‬‬
‫‪Speed‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪No. Source‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪14:07‬‬
‫‪13:07‬‬
‫‪01 SUN‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪14:08‬‬
‫‪12:08‬‬
‫‪02 MON‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪No. 01‬‬
‫‪Speed‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪Source‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪14:07‬‬
‫‪13:07‬‬
‫‪01 SUN‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪00:48 SP‬‬
‫‪Available Time‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Delete‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻮاد اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﺪ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻟﻤﺤﻮ زوﻻ ﻣﺜﻞ " ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮ رﻗﻢ‬
‫‪٠١‬؟ "‪.‬‬
‫‪Scheduled Record List‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Current Time 12:27‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪Speed‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﻤﺤﻮ أي إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Day‬‬
‫‪No. Source‬‬
‫‪01 SUN No.‬‬
‫‪13:0701 14:07‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪02 MON 12:08 14:08‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫’‪Do you /want to/ delete ‘No.01‬‬
‫‪?:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪PR 01‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Yes‬ﺛﻤﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ TIMER‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Programme‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ OK‬أو اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٤٤-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:24:02 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 44‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل اﻟﻰ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ أﺛﻨﺎء إﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﻳﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪“Press STOP button once more to cancel Timer Record.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎﻓﻤﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪Timer Record‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Press STOP button once more‬‬
‫‪to cancel Timer Record.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫■‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫أو ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪You cannot record copy protected movie.‬‬
‫■‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص أو ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﻘﺮص‪(.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٤٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:24:04 PM‬‬
‫‪DVD-R130(arab)-1.indd 45‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻗﺮأ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ )دي ﻓﻲ دي ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻞ واﻷﻗﺮاص‪ .‬ورﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻫﺬه ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻼءﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬وإذا ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬ورﻗﻢ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﳉﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪ م اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﺰء ّ‬
‫واﻟﻌﺮض ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫رﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫أودﻳﻮ‪+‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫أودﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AUDIO-CD‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫أودﻳﻮ‪+‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫أودﻳﻮ‪+‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪MPEG4‬‬
‫‪CD-R/-RW‬‬
‫‪DVD-R/-RW‬‬
‫دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪D I G I TA L‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL OUT‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت رﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺒﺚ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎل ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﳌﺘﺤﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫أﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪...‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪٦٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص‪٧٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص أودﻳﻮ‪٦٥ .......................................... MP3/‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ‪٠٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪١٦ ....................................................... MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪٢٦ .............................................‬‬
‫اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫أﻗﺼﻰ وﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫‪٠٤٢‬‬
‫وﺟﻪ ﻓﺮدي)‪٢١‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪٠٨٤‬‬
‫وﺟﻬﲔ)‪ ٢١‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪٠٨‬‬
‫وﺟﻪ ﻓﺮدي)‪٨‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪٠٦١‬‬
‫وﺟﻬﲔ)‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫وﺟﻪ ﻓﺮدي)‪٢١‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪٠٢‬‬
‫وﺟﻪ ﻓﺮدي)‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪:XP) ١‬اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﳌﻤﺘﺎزة(‬
‫‪:SP) ٢‬اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪:LP) ٤‬اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﻠﻲ(‬
‫)‪(GB ٧٫٤‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬أو ‪:EP) ٨‬اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫‪:XP) ١‬اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﳌﻤﺘﺎزة(‬
‫‪:SP) ٢‬اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪:LP) ٤‬اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﻠﻲ(‬
‫)‪(GB ٧٫٤‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬أو ‪:EP) ٨‬اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﻮﻗﺖ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ واﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-Video‬ﻣﻊ رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ " ‪ " ٢‬أو " ﻛﻞ "‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-R‬ﻣﻦ ‪ GB ٩٫٣‬ﻟﻼﻋﺘﻤﺎد‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ ‪ (VR‬اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-R‬وﻗﺮص ‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫إﲤﺎﻣﻪ وﰎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ MV-Disc/PD/DVD-ROM‬اﻟﺦ‪...‬‬
‫‪CD-I/CD-G/CDV/CD-ROM/CVD/SVCD/Video CD‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٤٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:11 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 46‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬أو اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻷﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ ،‬أو ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻼت اﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زاوﻳﺔ‬
‫وﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ .‬اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫اﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻘﺮص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺦ أو اﳋﺪش‪ .‬وﺑﺼﺎﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻷﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ‪ ،‬اﻟﻮﺳﺦ‪ ،‬اﻟﻐﺒﺎر‪ ،‬اﳋﺪش أو وﺿﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ دﺧﺎن اﻟﺴﺠﺎرة ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص ﻏﻴﺮ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫أﺟﻬﺰة دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬وﻓﻘﺎ ﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص وﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ رﻗﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻰ اﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﺻﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫• ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺻﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻳﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز اﻷﻗﺮاص ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﻰ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ وإدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز وﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ PLAY‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ وﺟﻮد ﻗﺮص ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺰر ‪.PLAY‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STOP‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬا‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ إﺣﺪاث ﺿﺮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص وإﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ درج اﻷﻗﺮاص أﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﻪ أو إﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻋﻄﻼً ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻷﺷﻴﺎء اﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص أو‬
‫داﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف أو ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪث ﻫﺬا اﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺬ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻷﻃﻔﺎل إﺻﺎﺑﻴﻌﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص وﺷﺎﺷﻲ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮﺻﺎ واﺣﺪا ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺮة‪ .‬وإدﺧﺎل‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﲔ أو أﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ وﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ إﺣﺪاث ﺿﺮر‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ دي ﻓﻲ دي‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫■‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ اﳉﻬﺎز أﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ PLAY‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﻰ أﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪) .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء إﺧﺮاة اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫أو إﻃﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﳉﻬﺎز أو ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪STOP‬‬
‫ﻣﺮةﺗﲔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪DVD-VIDEO،‬‬
‫‪ DVD-R ،DVD-RW‬أو أﻗﺮاص اﻷودﻳﻮ )‪.CDs(CD-DA‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٤٧-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:17 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 47‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮي ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻔﺼﻮل‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎرات‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫ﻋﻦ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ...‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ DISC MENU‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ TITLE MENU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫• اﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ وﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أن اﻟﻘﺮص ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ أﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ .‬وﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ اﻷﻗﺮاص وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪DVD-RW/-R‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫ﻷن ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺬي ﰎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬إذا ﰎ ﻣﺤﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ :‬ﻫﺬا ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﻟﺬي ﰎ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺮﻏﻮب‬
‫ﻓﻲ إدﺧﺎل ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض واﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي اﺧﺘﺎره اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬وﻷن اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻀﺮورﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺮﻏﻮب‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳊﺮض‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ أو ﻣﺴﺎر‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ‪SEARCH( /‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO/‬‬
‫‪DVD-R/DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪MPEG4‬‬
‫)‪AUDIO CD(CDDA‬‬
‫‪ Fast 1‬‬
‫‪ Fast 3‬‬
‫‪ Fast 5‬‬
‫‪Fast 1‬‬
‫‪Fast 3‬‬
‫‪ Fast 2‬‬
‫‪ Fast 1‬‬
‫‪X4‬‬
‫‪X2‬‬
‫‪X8‬‬
‫‪X2‬‬
‫‪ Fast 2‬‬
‫‪ Fast 4‬‬
‫‪ Fast 6‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻻﲡﺎه اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.PLAY‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ SEARCH‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺮي )‬
‫واﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑـ ‪. Fast 2‬‬
‫( ‪ ،SEARCH‬ﻳﺠﺮي اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫إذا رﻓﻌﺖ اﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ زر )‬
‫ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫• اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت ﻓﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء وﺿﻊ ‪) Scan‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Fast 1‬اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪.(١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ‪ MPEG4‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮص اﳌﻀﻐﻮط )‪ ،(CD-DA‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎع‬
‫ﺻﻮت ﻓﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء وﺿﻊ ‪) Scan‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٤٨-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:18 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 48‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ اﻟﻔﺼﻮل أو اﳌﺴﺎرات‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ أو‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر )‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ‪ SKIP‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫• إذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر) ( ‪.SKIP‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر أو ﺻﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫)ﻗﺮص ‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪.SKIP‬‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺧﻼل ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮان ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﻳﺎة‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو اﳌﺴﺎر أو ﺻﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )ﻗﺮص ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ أو اﳋﻄﻮة‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫( ‪ SEARCH‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‬
‫• إذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪،SEARCH‬‬
‫‪Slow 1‬‬
‫← ‪Slow 2‬‬
‫← ‪Slow 3‬‬
‫• إذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪،SEARCH‬‬
‫‪Slow 1‬‬
‫← ‪Slow 2‬‬
‫← ‪Slow 3‬‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) ANYKEY‬أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح( ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮل اﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎر‪ ،‬وﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ واﻷودﻳﻮ وﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ واﻟﺰووم‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪ANYKEY‬‬
‫• إذا أردت اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﻓﺼﻞ أو ﻣﺴﺎر ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺮﻏﻮب ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪Slow 3‬‬
‫( ‪ SEARCH‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر )‬
‫اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬وﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﺒﻂء ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪.Slow 1‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺰر‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﳊﺮﻛﺎت ﺧﻄﻮة ﻓﺨﻄﻮة‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Title‬ﻋﻨﻮان( أو‬
‫‪) Chapter‬ﻓﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ اﺗﺠﺎه‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺮاص ‪.MPEG4‬‬
‫( ‪ STEP‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر )‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Slow 3‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪.PLAY‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫أو أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ) ‪ (٩ - ٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪ ،STEP‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪ ،STEP‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.PLAY‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺠﺎوز ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ اﺗﺠﺎه‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺮاص ‪.MPEG4‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٤٩-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:20 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 49‬‬
‫• إذا أردت اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺮﻏﺮوب ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﻜﺮر)ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Time‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪NUMBER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪0~9‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REPEAT‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎت واﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ واﻟﺜﻮاﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮاﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أرزار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪.OK‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص‪.‬‬
‫عﻧﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص أوديو )‪ CD(CD-DA‬أو ﻗﺮص ‪،MP3‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ الوﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ اﻟﺸﺎشة‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬ﻣﺮة‬
‫أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REPEAT‬أو زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪Tilte‬‬
‫أو ‪ Chapter‬ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺮارا‪ .‬واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪.OK‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻜﺮر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻜﺮر اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي ‪-‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REPEAT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Off‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ أو زر ‪ REPEAT‬واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ CANCEL‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٠-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:22 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 50‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﳉﺰء اﳌﻌﲔ ﺗﻜﺮارا )ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺮض ‪(A-B‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪ANYKEY‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪ANYKEY‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Repeat‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Title‬أو ‪ Chapter‬ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮارا‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Repeat‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.A-B‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أو زر ‪.RETURN‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪A-B‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ٤‬اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪاﻳﺘﻬﺎ )‪ ،(A‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫)‪.(B‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ DVD-R ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﻮ ‪ DVD-RW‬وﺿﻌﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻏﻴﺮﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﻼ ﺗﻜﺮر‬
‫أﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻮل‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض ﳉﺰء ‪ A-B‬ﻳﺒﺪأ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي ‪-‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ‪) Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪) Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮار( أو اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.CANCEL‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫إذا ﺿﺒﻄﺖ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (B‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮور ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮان‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻨﻊ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺮض ‪ A-B‬ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص أودﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪ CDs(CDDA‬وأﻗﺮاص ‪.MP3‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥١-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:23 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 51‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬وﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻐﺎت اﻷودﻳﻮ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬وﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ SUBTITLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ AUDIO‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ SUBTITLE‬أو زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻼﺷﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ CANCEL‬أو زر ‪.RETURN‬‬
‫‪ENG Dolby Digital 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ AUDIO‬أو زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻷودﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪ANYKEY‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪ANYKEY‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Subtitle‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Audio‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﺪاﺧﻠﺖ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:24 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 52‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮة‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰواﻳﺎ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‪ .‬وﻫﺬا ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬وإذا اﺣﺘﻮى اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰواﻳﺎ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ANGLE‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Zoom‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ .OK‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﺮض ) (‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Angle‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫أو أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪1/28‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪00:00:01‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ENG‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪D 5.1CH‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ .OK‬وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﻜ ّﺒﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﻦ اﳊﺠﻢ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ▲▼‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم زواﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮة ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺠﻢ اﻟﻌﺎدي ← ‪ ← 2X ← 4X ← 2X‬اﻟﺤﺠﻢ اﻟﻌﺎدي‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰر ‪) ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻨﻮع‪ ،‬وﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﻗﺮاص‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﻦ اﳊﺠﻢ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻰ أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺮات ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳊﺠﻢ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:26 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 53‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص ‪DVD-‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO‬أو ‪) DVD-R/-RW‬وﺿﻊ ‪ ،(V‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ‪(V‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MARKER‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪- - - - - - - - - --‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MARKER‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 2 - - - - - - - --‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪ PLAY‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪1 - - - - - - - - --‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MARKER‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪ ٤‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪1 2 - - - - - - - --‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪1 2 - - - - - - - --‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ CANCEL‬ﶈﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫‪1 - - - - - - - - --‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ﻛ ّﺮر ﻧﻔﺲ اﻹﺟﺮاءات ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٠١‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺛﻢ إﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٤-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:27 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 54‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺻﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MARKER‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪N:0‬‬
‫‪-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MARKER‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Marker‬‬
‫‪N:2‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪01 02 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ١٠‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪01 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪Marker‬‬
‫‪01 02 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ) ( ‪ ،SKIP‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪ .‬ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺧﻼل ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮان إﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء اﻟﻤﺤﺪد اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ) ( ‪ ،SKIP‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪Marker‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MARKER‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ CANCEL‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫‪01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 N : 10‬‬
‫‪Marker‬‬
‫‪01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 -- N : 9‬‬
‫‪Marker‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪ PLAY‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﻰ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ٢٠‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪ ٤‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪N:2‬‬
‫‪Marker‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪N:1‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• أﻗﺮاص ‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﻬﺎ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬وﺗﺴﻤﺢ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪا‪ .‬وﻷن اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮة اﺨﻤﻟﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺮﻣﻮزا ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻮه‪ .‬وﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ ‪،(VR‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ أرﻗﺎم ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬إذا ﰎ ﻣﺤﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ أرﻗﺎم ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ واﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ وﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:27:29 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 46-55.indd 55‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ‪MP3/‬‬
‫اﻷزرار ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ)‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ )‪MP3/(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺮص وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ )‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﺮص أودﻳﻮ )‪ (CD-DA‬اﻟﻰ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ وﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‬
‫)اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Music List‬‬
‫‪01/15‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪0:03:50‬‬
‫‪0:04:00‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪TRACK 2‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪0:03:49‬‬
‫‪0:03:47‬‬
‫‪0:04:29‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪TRACK 3‬‬
‫‪TRACK 4‬‬
‫‪TRACK 5‬‬
‫‪TRACK 6‬‬
‫‪TRACK 7‬‬
‫‪003‬‬
‫‪004‬‬
‫‪005‬‬
‫‪006‬‬
‫‪007‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪► 0:00:01‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪CDDA‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ)‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Music List‬‬
‫‪01/15‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪0:03:50‬‬
‫‪0:04:00‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪TRACK 2‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪0:03:49‬‬
‫‪0:03:47‬‬
‫‪0:04:29‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪TRACK 3‬‬
‫‪TRACK 4‬‬
‫‪TRACK 5‬‬
‫‪TRACK 6‬‬
‫‪TRACK 7‬‬
‫‪003‬‬
‫‪004‬‬
‫‪005‬‬
‫‪006‬‬
‫‪007‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪► 0:00:01‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪CDDA‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫‪ .١‬رﻣﺰ وﺿﻊ ‪) Play‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬اﳌﺴﺎر )اﻟﻐﻨﺎء( اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﻌﺮض ﻓﻬﺮس اﻻﺷﺘﻐﺎل اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ورﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ أن ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﺮص ووﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺗﻌﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﺴﺎرات )ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ( ووﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﺰر‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ▼▲ .١‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎر)ﻏﻨﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫‪ : .٢‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر)اﻟﻐﻨﺎء( اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬زر ‪ : OK‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر)اﻟﻐﻨﺎء( اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬زر ) ( ‪ : SKIP‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬زر ) ( ‪ : SKIP‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬وإذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫وإذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﺧﻼل ﺛﻼث ﺛﻮان ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫وإذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻼث ﺛﻮان‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر‬
‫اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ) ‪ : SEARCH ( /‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪،٢X‬‬
‫‪(٨X ، ٤X‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬زر ‪ : STOP‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻣﺴﺎر)ﻏﻨﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬زر ‪ : PLAY/PAUSE‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر)ﻏﻨﺎء( أو ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬زر ‪ : ANYKEY‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪Repeat‬‬
‫)ﺗﻜﺮار( أو ‪) Play Option‬ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ((‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:26 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 56‬‬
MP3 ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
MP3 ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص‬
١
٢
MP3
Music List
SONG01
٤
٣
► 0:00:15
002
SONG01
4.0MB
01/26/2006
003
004
005
006
MP3
PLAY MODE
.‫ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬MP3 ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﺮص‬
01/13
No.
MOVE
Title
ROOT
SONG01
SONG02
٥
SONG03
SONG04
SONG05
SONG06
OK
RETURN
EXIT
٦
.(‫ )اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Play ‫ رﻣﺰ وﺿﻊ‬.١
‫ اﳌﺴﺎر)اﻟﻐﻨﺎء( اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬.٢
.‫ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ )اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ( اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬.٣
‫ ﻫﺬا ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ووﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬.٤
.‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﺣﻠﻴﺎ‬
.‫ ﺗﻌﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻹﺿﺒﺎرة وﻣﺴﺎراﺗﻬﺎ‬.٥
‫اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ أو ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬.‫ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺰر‬.٦
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
DivX
►
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
MOVE
►
►
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Navigation ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
DivX
►
►
Music
►
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Music ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
MP3
٣
Music List
SONG01
01/13
No.
Title
► 0:00:15
002
ROOT
SONG01
SONG02
SONG01
4.0MB
01/26/2006
003
004
005
006
SONG03
SONG04
SONG05
SONG06
PLAY MODE
MOVE
MP3
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
٢
Disc Navigation
Programme Photo
Setup
١
Disc Navigation
OK
RETURN
EXIT
.‫ وﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات)اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬MP3 ‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻪر ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر)اﻟﻐﻨﺎء( اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﺳﻤﻌﻪ‬
٤
٥٧- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 56-67.indd 57
3/28/2006 12:28:29 PM
‫اﻷزرار ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪MP3‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﻜﺮر)ﺗﻜﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض(‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰر ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮار(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮار( أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻣﺰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ‪) Track‬اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ( ) ( وﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ اﶈﺪدة ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Music List‬‬
‫‪01/15‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪0:03:50‬‬
‫‪0:04:00‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪TRACK 2‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪0:03:49‬‬
‫‪0:03:47‬‬
‫‪0:04:29‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪TRACK 3‬‬
‫‪TRACK 4‬‬
‫‪TRACK 5‬‬
‫‪TRACK 6‬‬
‫‪TRACK 7‬‬
‫‪003‬‬
‫‪004‬‬
‫‪005‬‬
‫‪006‬‬
‫‪007‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪ : ▼▲ .١‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎر)ﻏﻨﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫‪ : .٢‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر)اﻟﻐﻨﺎء( اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬زر ‪ : OK‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر)اﻟﻐﻨﺎء( اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر أو ﺗﻌﺮض اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻹﺿﺒﺎرة اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬زر ‪ : RETURN‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ اﻟﻰ اﻹﺿﺒﺎرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﻐﻨﺎء اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬زر ) ( ‪ : SKIP‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬زر ) ( ‪ : SKIP‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬وإذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ وﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫وإذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﺧﻼل ﺛﻼث ﺛﻮان ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫وإذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻼث ﺛﻮان‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬زر ‪ : STOP‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻣﺴﺎر)ﻏﻨﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬زر ‪ : PLAY/PAUSE‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر)ﻏﻨﺎء( أو ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬زر ‪ : ANYKEY‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪) Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮار( أو ‪) Play Option‬ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ((‪.‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪► 0:00:07‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪CDDA‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮار( ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻣﺰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ‪ ) Disc‬اﻟﻘﺮص( ) ( )اﻟﻜﻞ( وﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺬي ﰎ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص ‪ ،MP3‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻣﺰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ‪Folder‬‬
‫)اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ( ) ( وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﻮاد اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮار( ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ‪) Disc‬اﻟﻘﺮص(‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Music List‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪01/15‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪0:03:50‬‬
‫‪0:04:00‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪TRACK 2‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪0:03:49‬‬
‫‪0:03:47‬‬
‫‪0:04:29‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪TRACK 3‬‬
‫‪TRACK 4‬‬
‫‪TRACK 5‬‬
‫‪TRACK 6‬‬
‫‪TRACK 7‬‬
‫‪003‬‬
‫‪004‬‬
‫‪005‬‬
‫‪006‬‬
‫‪007‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪► 0:00:07‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪CDDA‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪-‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮار(‬
‫إﻟﻰ أن ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ رﻣﺰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪.CANCEL‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٨-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:30 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 58‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰر ‪) ANYKEY‬أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) ANYKEY‬أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح( ﻓﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ إﻃﺎر ‪) PLAY MODE‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Music List‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪01/15‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪0:03:50‬‬
‫‪0:04:00‬‬
‫‪0:03:49‬‬
‫‪0:03:47‬‬
‫‪0:04:29‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪TRACK 2‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪003 : Off‬‬
‫‪TRACK 3‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪: Normal‬‬
‫‪004optionTRACK‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪005‬‬
‫‪TRACK 5‬‬
‫‪006‬‬
‫‪TRACK 6‬‬
‫‪007‬‬
‫‪TRACK 7‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪► 0:00:07‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) ANYKEY‬أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح( ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) Stop‬إﻳﻘﺎف(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ إﻃﺎر ‪) PLAY MODE‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪CDDA‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Music List‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪01/15‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﳌﻄﻠﻮب )‪) Track‬اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ(‬
‫أو ‪) Disc‬اﻟﻘﺮص(( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪ ،MP3‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Track‬اﳌﺎدة‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ( أو ‪) Folder‬اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ( أو ‪) Disc‬اﻟﻘﺮص(‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪-‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ أو ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ‪) Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف( ﻓﻲ إﻃﺎر وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪0:03:50‬‬
‫‪0:04:00‬‬
‫‪0:03:49‬‬
‫‪0:03:47‬‬
‫‪0:04:29‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪0:03:44‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪TRACK 2‬‬
‫‪Repeat : Off‬‬
‫‪003‬‬
‫‪TRACK 3‬‬
‫‪Play 004‬‬
‫‪option : TRACK‬‬
‫‪Normal4‬‬
‫‪005‬‬
‫‪TRACK 5‬‬
‫‪006‬‬
‫‪TRACK 6‬‬
‫‪007‬‬
‫‪TRACK 7‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ 0:00:20‬‬
‫‪TRACK 1‬‬
‫‪CDDA‬‬
‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‬
‫)‪) Normal‬ﻋﺎدي( أو ‪) Random‬ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ( أو ‪Intro‬‬
‫أو ‪) Playlist‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(( ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎر ‪Play‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺬي ﰎ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ ‪ :‬وﺗﻌﺮض ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮان أوﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر‪ .‬وإذا أردت‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﻟﻰ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر‬
‫‪.PLAY‬‬
‫وﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي‪ .‬وﻋﻨﺪ اﻛﺘﻤﺎل‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺮي اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :‬وﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪ .‬وﺑﻌﺪ ﺻﻨﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ وﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ‪،‬‬
‫وﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ اﻷﺧﺮى وﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ‪ .‬وﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥٩-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:30 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 59‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ﺻﻮرة‬
.‫ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬JPEG ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﺮص‬
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
١
‫ﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ اﳌﺴﺎرات‬
.‫ ﻣﺴﺎرات ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬٣٠ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
Stop ‫ )أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح( ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬ANYKEY ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.(‫)إﻳﻘﺎف‬
.(‫ )وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬PLAY MODE ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ إﻃﺎر‬
CD
Music List
TRACK 1
01/15
Disc Navigation
DivX
►
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
0:00:20
►
TRACK 1
►
CDDA
PLAY MODE
OK
MOVE
EXIT
RETURN
‫ ﺛﻢ‬Disc Navigation ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
CD
Disc
Navigation
٢
Disc Navigation
DivX
►
Programme Photo
Music
Setup
►
►
No.
Title
001
TRACK 1
PLAY MODE
002
TRACK 2
Repeat : Off
003
TRACK 3
Play 004
option : TRACK
Normal4
005
TRACK 5
006
TRACK 6
007
TRACK 7
MOVE
OK
Length
0:03:50
0:04:00
0:03:49
0:03:47
0:04:29
0:03:44
0:03:44
RETURN
OK
٢
.(‫ )ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٣
.(‫ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Playlist ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
(‫ )اﳌﻮاد اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬Tracks ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
OK ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬.‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Playlist ‫)ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ( ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﻮاد اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ اﶈﺪدة إﻟﻰ‬
.(‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
Playlist
EXIT
RETURN
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Photo ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
06/15
٣
CDDA
TRACK 1
001
TRACK 1
CDDA
TRACK 2
002
TRACK 3
CDDA
TRACK 3
003
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 4
004
TRACK 6
CDDA
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 6
CDDA
TRACK 7
CDDA
TRACK 8
PLAY MODE
JPEG01
OK
EXIT
01/10
ROOT
JPEG01
JPEG04
JPEG05
Slide Show
MOVE
.‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
MOVE
Photo List
JPEG02
JPEG03
JPEG06
JPEG07
OK
RETURN
،‫إذا ﻋﻤﻠﺖ ﻣﺴﺎرا ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬، ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.CANCEL ‫ ث اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫اﳌﺴﺎر اﳋﺎﻃﺊ‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮل اﳌﺴﺎر اﳋﺎﻃﺊ‬
EXIT
▼▲ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار‬
. SKIP ( ) ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ ﺻﻮر ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬٨ ‫• ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة‬
. SKIP ( ) ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ ﺻﻮر ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬٨ ‫• ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
٤
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
JPEG
EXIT
‫ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Playlist ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‬
.(‫ )ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Play option ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ‬
CD
MOVE
١
٤
CD
Playlist
03/03
CDDA
TRACK 1
001
TRACK 1
CDDA
TRACK 2
002
TRACK 3
CDDA
TRACK 3
003
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 4
CDDA
TRACK 5
CDDA
TRACK 6
CDDA
TRACK 7
OK
CLEAR
CDDA
TRACK 8
PLAY MODE
MOVE
EXIT
.‫ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬PLAY ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٥
٦٠- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 56-67.indd 60
3/28/2006 12:28:31 PM
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ١‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪) PLAY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Slide Show Speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻟﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫وﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MPEG4‬ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪات ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪. .divx ،.avi ،.DIVX ،.AVI -‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed‬‬
‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫‪JPEG01‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫‪PHOTO‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرة‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Album‬اﻷﻟﺒﻮم(‪ .‬وﺣﺪد أﺣﺪ أوﺿﺎع‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض )‪) Album screen‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم( أو ‪Slide‬‬
‫‪) show‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ( أو ‪) Rotation‬ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ( أو‬
‫‪) Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﺮص ‪ MPEG4‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Disc Navigation‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Disc‬‬
‫‪Navigation‬‬
‫‪Programme Photo‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪(DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪JPEG01‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪PHOTO‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Disc Navigaton‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Disc Navigation‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Programme Photo‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،DivX‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪DivX List‬‬
‫‪DIVX01‬‬
‫‪01/02‬‬
‫‪Size‬‬
‫‪70.8MB‬‬
‫‪73.6MB‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺪﺧﻮل اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﺸﺮاﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ،OK‬ﺗﺪور ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺰاوﻳﺔ ‪ ٠٩‬درﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﲡﺎه ﻋﻘﺮب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ، OK‬ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻰ ‪) *٤‬أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺮات‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳊﺠﻢ اﻟﻌﺎدي(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎدي ← ‪ ← Zoom X2 ← Zoom X4 ← Zoom X2‬ﻋﺎدي(‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ ANYKEY‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪Disc‬‬
‫‪Navigation‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪ROOT‬‬
‫‪DIVX01‬‬
‫‪DIVX02‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪MPEG4‬‬
‫‪ROOT‬‬
‫‪2006/01/01‬‬
‫‪70.8MB‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ )‪ ،avi (DivX‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ،OK‬زر أو زر ‪.PLAY‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،MPEG4‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ STOP‬ﻣﺮة أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻌﺮف ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦١-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:33 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 61‬‬
‫وﺻﻒ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻰ‬
‫) أو (‬
‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) أو زر ( ‪، SKIP‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﺪم أو ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﳌﺪة ‪ ٥‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫) أو (‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) أو ( ‪SEARCH‬‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ أﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Fast 3 ،Fast 2، Fast 1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ أو وﺿﻊ اﳋﻄﻮة‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ) ( ‪ SEARCH‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪(Slow 3 ،Slow 2، Slow 1) .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ) ( ‪ STEP‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮة ﻓﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر ﺑﺘﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DivX 3.11 : MPEG4 Codec‬و‪DivX 4.x‬‬‫و‪ DivX 5.x‬و‪DivX-Pro Xvid‬‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ QPEL :‬و‪GMC‬‬‫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ “MP3” :‬و”‪MPEG1‬‬‫‪ “Audio Layer2‬و”‪ “LPCM‬و”‪ “AC3‬و”‪“DTS‬‬
‫و”‪“MS ADPCM‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ‪p ،.sub ،.srt ،.smi :‬‬
‫‪) .ass ،.txt ،.psb‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻊ نفس اﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ‪.MPEG4‬‬
‫■ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MPEG4‬اﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫وﻫﻮ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻧﻮع ‪ Codec‬وﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫واﻟﻮﺿﻮﺣﻴﺔ اﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮق اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪1/6‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪00:06:32‬‬
‫► ‪00:08:16‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪No. Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪02 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪03 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪04 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪05 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪06 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺎدة ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.PLAY‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.STOP‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﳌﺎدة اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة )اﻟﻌﻨﻮان( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻟﻌﻮدة ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:35 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 62‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Title List‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ( أو‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪Created Time APR/21/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪00:01:43 SP‬‬
‫‪Playing Time 00:00:08‬‬
‫‪Title Protection Not Protected‬‬
‫‪JAN 01 2006 SUN‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪1/6‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪00:06:32‬‬
‫► ‪00:08:16‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Playing Info‬‬
‫‪APR/21/200612:00 PR1‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪No. Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪02 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪03 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪04 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪05 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪06 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ أﺣﺪ اﳌﺪﺧﻼت‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪) Title List‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ( أو ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.STOP‬‬
‫وﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪TITLE‬‬
‫‪.LIST‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮض ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ ANYKEY‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪12:00 00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪12:30 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫► ‪12:00 00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫‪Delete00:06:32‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫► ‪Edit 00:08:16‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪No. Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪02 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪03 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪04 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪05 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪06 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪00: 00: 08‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪D 1+1 L+R‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪CHANGE‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫)اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﶈﻮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪(٦٩ - ٦٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ز ‪.OK‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﳌﺎدة اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة )اﻟﻌﻨﻮان( ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪► Play‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ وﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INFO‬وﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Disc Name‬‬
‫‪Total Title‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Total Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Recordable Time 00:28 SP‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫‪Not Protected‬‬
‫‪Screen‬‬
‫‪Playback‬‬
‫‪JAN 01 2006 SUN‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:37 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 63‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﻮاد اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﳌﺎدة اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪:‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻨﻮان اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض(‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
‫‪) Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا اﳋﻴﺎر ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎل اﶈﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪) Rename‬إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان اﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬف(‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﺤﺬف اﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﺤﺬف ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Protection‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﺆدي ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر إﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎل‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪد أو إﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﺰر‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■ ﻫﺬا قد ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫■ وﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻘﺮص ‪) DVD-RW/DVD-R‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﶈﺪودة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦٤-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:38 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 64‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪم اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﺰء ّ‬
‫وﻳﺸﺮح ﻛﻼ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص ووﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺎدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ واﻷودﻳﻮ اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬وﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻋﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫ﻷن ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬إذا ﰎ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻋﻨﻮان واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ)ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان( ‪٦٦ ..................‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﻘﺪم )ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪٠٧ ...................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ اﻟﻘﺮص ‪٨٧ ........................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫• ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻫﺬه ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﺎدة ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺮﻏﻮب‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮان اﳌﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮض اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي اﺧﺘﺎره‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬وﻷن اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮب ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ اﳌﺎدة اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أو اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪث ﺧﻄﺄ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺪوث اﻧﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﳌﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ أن اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺘﻀﺮرة ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:39 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 65‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان(‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ▲▼‬
‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫)‪Sports(A1‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ )وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻗﻌﺔ( ﻋﻨﻮان‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪Save‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Title List‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ( أو ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪1/6‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪00:06:32‬‬
‫► ‪00:08:16‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪No. Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪02 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪03 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪04 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪05 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪06 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪) Back Space‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﺤﺬف‬
‫اﻟﺤﺮف اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Space‬اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ( ‪ :‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻓﺮاغ وﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ اﻷﻣﺎم )اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻤﲔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Delete‬اﶈﻮ( ‪ :‬ﶈﻮ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﺸﻴﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪) Clear‬اﶈﻮ( ‪ :‬ﶈﻮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Save‬اﳊﻔﻆ( ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Save‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ▲▼‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض اﺳﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎدة اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪00:06:32‬‬
‫► ‪12:30 00:08:16‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪No. Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪02 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪03 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪04 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫)‪05 Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪06 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺎدة ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ ،Title List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪12:00 00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪12:30 00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪Play 00:00:15‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪Delete00:06:32‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫► ‪Edit 00:08:16‬‬
‫‪12:30‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Back Space‬‬
‫‪No. Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪02 APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪03 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪04 APR/20/2006‬‬
‫‪05 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪06 APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Rename‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006 12:00 PR1‬‬
‫‪Save‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪Back Space‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:28:40 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 56-67.indd 66‬‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،On ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻰ زري‬
‫ وﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ‬.OK
( ← ) ( .‫اﳌﺎدة اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة اﻟﻲ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ اﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
DVD-RW(VR)
‫ﻗﻔﻞ)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ( ﻋﻨﻮان‬
.‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺎدة ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﶈﻮ اﳌﻔﺎﺟﺊ‬
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Sports(A1)
APR/21/2006
SP
MOVE
٤
OK
Title
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
RETURN
Length Edit
00:00:21 ►
00:00:03 ►
00:00:15 ►
00:00:16 ►
00:06:32 ►
00:08:16 ►
TITLE LIST ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
.TITLE LIST ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
EXIT
١
.MENU ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻋﻨﻮان‬
.‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﶈﻮ ﻣﺎدة ﻣﻦ ﻻﻇﺤﻮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
.MENU ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Title List ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
.‫ أو ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،(‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Drama
1/6
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Drama
APR/19/2006
TITLE LIST ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
.TITLE LIST ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
SP
MOVE
١
.MENU ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
.MENU ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Title List ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
.‫ أو ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،(‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬
DVD-RW(VR)
Drama
APR/19/2006
SP
MOVE
OK
Title
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
RETURN
5/6
Sports (A1)
SP
MOVE
OK
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Sports (A1)
APR/21/2006
SP
MOVE
OK
Title
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
RETURN
Length Edit
00:00:21 ►
00:00:03 ►
Play 00:00:15 ►
Rename
00:00:16 ►
Delete
00:06:32 ►
Edit 00:08:16 ►
Protection
Title
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
Length Edit
00:00:21 ►
00:00:03 ►
Play 00:00:15 ►
Rename
00:00:16 ►
Delete
00:06:32 ►
Edit 00:08:16 ►
Protection
EXIT
RETURN
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Protection ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
EXIT
٢
DVD-RW(VR)
٣
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
APR/21/2006
SP
MOVE
٢
Title List
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Sports (A1)
DVD-RW(VR)
EXIT
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺎدة ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،Title List
APR/21/2006
Length Edit
00:00:21 ►
00:00:03 ►
00:00:15 ►
00:00:16 ►
00:06:32 ►
00:08:16 ►
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺎدة ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
RETURN
Sports (A1)
1/6
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Length Edit
00:00:21 ►
00:00:03 ►
00:00:15 ►
00:00:16 ►
00:06:32 ►
00:08:16 ►
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Drama
OK
Title
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
OK
Title
Drama
Music
Sports
Movie
Sports(A1)
Edu 1
Length Edit
00:00:21 ►
00:00:03 ►
Play00:00:15 ►
Rename
00:00:16 ►
Delete
00:06:32 ►
Edit00:08:16 ►
Protection
RETURN
EXIT
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Sports (A1)
5/6
EXIT
Title Protection :
Sports (A1)
On
APR/21/2006
Off
SP
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
٦٧- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 56-67.indd 67
3/28/2006 12:28:41 PM
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▼▲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Delete‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺟﺰ ء ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮان‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﶈﻮ ﺟﺰ ء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪Play 00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫► ‪00:06:32‬‬
‫► ‪Edit 00:08:16‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪Drama‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Sports‬‬
‫‪Movie‬‬
‫)‪Sports(A1‬‬
‫‪Edu 1‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Title List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫وﺳﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ أوﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ ‪ :(VR‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪‘Do you want to delete? (Related Playlists‬‬
‫’)‪) may be deleted.‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﶈﻮ؟ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪1/6‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪00:06:32‬‬
‫► ‪00:08:16‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪Drama‬‬
‫?‪Do you want to delete‬‬
‫‪(Related playlists‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪Drama‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Sports‬‬
‫‪Movie‬‬
‫)‪Sports(A1‬‬
‫‪Edu 1‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪Drama‬‬
‫‪APR/19/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫)‪may be deleted.‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ :DVD-R ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﶈﻮ ؟‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺎدة ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪5/6‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪Play 00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫► ‪00:06:32‬‬
‫► ‪Edit 00:08:16‬‬
‫‪Protection‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Yes‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﺎدة ﰎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫إذا أردت ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﺎدة ﰎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﺧﺘﺮ " ‪ "Off‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻲ ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻠﻰ اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻮل ﻣﺎدة ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﲤﺎم ‪ ،DVD-RW ،DVD-R‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﶈﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﺮص ‪ ،DVD-R‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪Drama‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Sports‬‬
‫‪Movie‬‬
‫)‪Sports(A1‬‬
‫‪Edu 1‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫)‪Sports (A1‬‬
‫‪APR/21/2006‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Edit‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Title List‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title List No. 05‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦٨-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:29:44 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 68‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ووﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاة ﶈﻮ‬
‫اﳉﺰء‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Title List‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ OK‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.Delete‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ?‪‘Do you want to delete‬‬
‫’)‪) (Deleted part will not be restored.‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺬف؟ )ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﻤﺤﺬوف((‪.‬‬
‫‪Title List No. 05‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪Edit Title List‬‬
‫‪Title List No. 05‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪00:00:06‬‬
‫‪00:00:06‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫?‪Do you want to delete‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫)‪(Deleted part will not be restored.‬‬
‫‪00:00:05‬‬
‫‪00:10:15‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪00:10:15‬‬
‫«‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Edit Title List‬‬
‫‪Title List No. 05‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪00:00:06‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪00:00:06‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Yes‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫وﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ اﳉﺰء اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫وﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Return‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫ﻗﻀﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﶈﻮ اﳉﺰء واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﶈﻮ اﳉﺰء واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫• اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ واﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮه‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷزرار اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫• اﻷزرار اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض ‪( ، ، ، ، ) :‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ عﻟﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■ ﻣﺪة اﳉﺰء اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮه ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ أﻧﻬﺎ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺛﻮان‪.‬‬
‫■ إذا أﻗﻞ ﻣﺪة اﳉﺰء اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮه ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮان‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " اﳌﺪى ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺟﺪا"‪.‬‬
‫■ إذا ﻛﺎن وﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺎء أﺳﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫■ وﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﻮ اﳉﺰء ﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ووﻗﺖ اﳉﺰء ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﶈﻮ‬
‫اﳉﺰء‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Title List‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Title ListNo. 05‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪00:10:15‬‬
‫‪00:00:06‬‬
‫‪00:10:15‬‬
‫‪II‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦٩-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:29:47 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 69‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﻘﺪم‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ّ‬
‫)ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Make Scene‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No. 001‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪00:10:00‬‬
‫إﺑﺪاع ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Playlist‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Title List‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Make‬‬
‫وﻳﻀﺎف ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ وﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،New Playlist‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪-‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Make Scene‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:32‬‬
‫‪Title List : 1/6‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Make‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Make Scene‬‬
‫‪No. Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/23/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪02 APR/23/2006 12:30‬‬
‫‪03 APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪04 APR/24/2006 12:30‬‬
‫‪05 APR/25/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪APR/25/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪1 Scene‬‬
‫‪APR/25/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪APR/25/2006‬‬
‫‪5/5‬‬
‫‪Scene No. 001‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Return‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﻛ ّﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ ٦ - ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أﻧﻚ ﺻﻨﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻛ ّﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ ٦ - ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻨﻊ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ‪-‬‬
‫‪Programme‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺤﺮك ﻗﻀﻴﺐ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﻊ اﳌﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Make‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪00:00:10‬‬
‫‪II‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪Title List : 1/6‬‬
‫‪00:10:00‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻹﺑﺪاع ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺟﺪﻳﺪةﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮان‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬أ زر ‪ PLAY LIST‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No. 001‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪Title List : 1/6‬‬
‫‪00:00:10‬‬
‫‪00:00:10‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Make‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﺑﺪاع ‪ ٩٩‬ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺤﺮك ﻗﻀﻴﺐ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺎدة اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ إﺑﺪاع ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷزرار ) ‪ ( ، ، ، ، ، ،‬اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٧٠-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:29:49 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 70‬‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Play ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٤
► Play
‫ﻋﺮض اﳌﻮاد ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
.‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻮاد ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
(VR ‫)وﺿﻊ‬
‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬PLAY LIST ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ اﺿﻐﻂ‬:‫• ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳊﺎﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص وﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
.‫ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﻘﺮص‬INFO ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Name
Total Title
Total Playlist
Recordable Time
Protection
Screen
JAN 01 2006 SUN
Disc Info
19
5
01:09 SP
Not Protected
Playback [ Playlist ]
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
1/5
1/5
APR/23/2006
APR/23/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/23/2006 12:00
MOVE
13:00
‫ وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ‬.‫ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬INFO ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
OK
No.
Title
01 APR/23/2006 12:00
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
Length Edit
00:00:21 ►
00:00:03 ►
00:00:15 ►
00:00:16 ►
00:00:32 ►
RETURN
EXIT
.MENU ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Edit Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Name
Playing Info
APR/24/2006 12:00 PR1
Playlist
Created Time
Length
Playing Time
Total scene
JAN 01 2006 SUN
3/5
APR/24/2006 12:00
00: 01: 09 SP
00: 00: 08
1
Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Title Menu
New Playlist
►
Playlist
Edit Playlist
►
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
13:00
MOVE
‫• وﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
.‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض‬STOP ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
٤
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
. ‫أو زر‬
٢
،(‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Play : ‫وﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
،(‫ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬Edit Scene ،(‫ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬Rename
.(‫ )ﺣﺬف‬Delete ،(‫ )ﻧﺴﺦ‬Copy
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
3/5
3/5
APR/24/2006
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
١
No.
Title
Length Edit
01 APR/23/2006 12:00 00:00:21 ►
02 APR/23/2006 12:30
Play 00:00:03 ►
03 APR/24/2006 12:00
00:00:15 ►
Rename
04 APR/24/2006 12:30
00:00:16 ►
Edit Scene
05 APR/25/2006 12:00
Copy 00:00:32 ►
APR/24/2006 12:00
1 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
٧١- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 71
3/28/2006 12:29:52 PM
‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﳌﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ادﺧﻞ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار‬
‫▲▼ ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Dolphin‬‬
‫)وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ PLAY LIST‬ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪APR/23/2006‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪00:00:21‬‬
‫‪00:00:03‬‬
‫‪00:00:15‬‬
‫‪00:00:16‬‬
‫‪00:00:32‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/23/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪02 APR/23/2006 12:30‬‬
‫‪03 APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪04 APR/24/2006 12:30‬‬
‫‪05 APR/25/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪APR/23/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪1 Scene‬‬
‫‪APR/23/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر ‪.MENU‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Playlist‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Edit Playlist‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪OK‬‬
‫أو زر ‪.‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺸﻲء ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٦٦‬‬
‫• وﻋﺪد اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ اﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺔ‪ .‬وﺟﻤﻴﻊ ‪ ١٣‬ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪1/5‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Save‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪Back Space‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Save‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ▲▼‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫وﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎل اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪3/5‬‬
‫‪3/5‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪12:00 00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪12:30 00:00:03‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫► ‪12:30 00:00:16‬‬
‫► ‪12:00 00:00:32‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Dolphin‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪01 APR/23/2006‬‬
‫‪02 APR/23/2006‬‬
‫‪03 Dolphin‬‬
‫‪04 APR/24/2006‬‬
‫‪05 APR/25/2006‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪Dolphin‬‬
‫‪1 Scene‬‬
‫‪APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫وﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪) Play :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Rename‬إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‪) Edit Scene ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Copy‬ﻧﺴﺦ(‪) Delete ،‬ﺣﺬف(‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪3/5‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬
‫‪APR/24/2006‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪Length‬‬
‫‪01 APR/23/2006 12:00 00:00:21‬‬
‫‪02 APR/23/2006 12:30‬‬
‫‪Play 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪03 APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫‪04 APR/24/2006 12:30‬‬
‫‪00:00:16‬‬
‫‪Edit Scene‬‬
‫‪05 APR/25/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪Copy 00:00:32‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫‪APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪1 Scene‬‬
‫‪APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Rename‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻮاد ﻻﺋﺤﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪3/5‬‬
‫‪APR/24/2006‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪Length Edit‬‬
‫► ‪01 APR/23/2006 12:00 00:00:21‬‬
‫► ‪Play 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪02 APR/23/2006 12:30‬‬
‫‪03 APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫‪04 APR/24/2006 12:30‬‬
‫► ‪00:00:16‬‬
‫‪Edit Scene‬‬
‫‪05 APR/25/2006 12:00‬‬
‫► ‪Copy 00:00:32‬‬
‫‪APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪1 Scene‬‬
‫‪APR/24/2006 12:00‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٧٢-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:29:53 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 72‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺎر‬
.‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي‬
▼▲ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار‬
.OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
٤
‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬PLAY LIST ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
1/4
1/4
Science
No.
01
02
03
04
Move
Add
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Delete
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮ ض اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‬
► Play
Title
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:37 ►
Science
7 Scene
APR/24/2006 10:43
EXIT
.OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٥
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
.MENU ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Edit Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
. ‫أو زر‬
.STOP ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﺮض اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
٢
،(‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Play : ‫وﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
،(‫ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬Edit Scene ،(‫ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬Rename
.(‫ )ﺣﺬف‬Delete ،(‫ )ﻧﺴﺦ‬Copy
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
3/4
Dolphin
No.
01
02
03
04
Dolphin
7 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
Length Edit
Science
00:00:17 ►
Sky
00:00:06 ►
Play
Dolphin
00:00:06 ►
Rename
Natural
00:00:37 ►
Edit Scene
Copy
Delete
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Edit Scene ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
.OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪيل اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
٣
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
3/4
3/4
Dolphin
No.
01
02
03
04
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
١
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Modify
01 00:00:26
(VR ‫)وﺿﻊ‬
Dolphin
7 Scene
APR/24/2006 12:00
MOVE
Title
Length Edit
Science
00:00:17 ►
Sky
00:00:06 ►
Play
Dolphin
00:00:06 ►
Rename
Natural
00:00:37 ►
Edit Scene
Copy
Delete
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
Edit Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
1/7
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
Move
Add
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
٧٣- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 73
3/28/2006 12:29:55 PM
.‫ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
٧
(‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ )اﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
Modify Scene
.٣٧ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬٣ - ١ ‫ اتﺑﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات‬،‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪاد‬
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 002
Start
End
Title List : 5/6
00:00:25
Start
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي‬
▼▲ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار‬
.OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬
00:00:30
00:00:30
II
End
Change
MOVE
Cancel
OK
RETURN
EXIT
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
.‫• وﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ووﻗﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Change ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
Play
Modify
٨
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
MOVE
RETURN
OK
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Modify ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
٥
Move
Add
OK
Move
Add
Modify
01 00:00:26
MOVE
٤
DVD-Recorder
Delete
Modify Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 002
Start
End
EXIT
.‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﳉﺰء اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‬
Title List : 5/6
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
►
Start
End
MOVE
Change
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
.‫ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
٦
Modify Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No. 002
Start
End
Title List : 5/6
00:00:25
00:00:00
00:00:25
►
Start
End
MOVE
Change
OK
Cancel
RETURN
EXIT
‫• ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬
.‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬
‫• اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ أو ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي‬
( ، ، ، ، ، ، ) ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷزرار‬
.‫اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
٧٤- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 74
3/28/2006 12:29:59 PM
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ(‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬اتﺑﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ ٣ - ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ▲▼‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺪ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No.‬‬
‫‪3/7‬‬
‫‪Edit Scene‬‬
‫‪Playlist No. 3‬‬
‫■ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر اﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻷن اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬اﻟﺬي‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﻌﺮوض‪.‬‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Modify‬‬
‫‪03 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪02 00:00:07‬‬
‫‪01 00:00:26‬‬
‫‪06 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪05 00:00:11‬‬
‫‪04 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪاد‪ ،‬اتﺑﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ ٣ - ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Move‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪Edit Scene‬‬
‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺎف اﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No.‬‬
‫‪3/7‬‬
‫‪Playlist No. 3‬‬
‫‪Edit Scene‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Modify‬‬
‫‪03 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪02 00:00:07‬‬
‫‪01 00:00:26‬‬
‫‪06 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪05 00:00:11‬‬
‫‪04 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪03 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪02 00:00:07‬‬
‫‪01 00:00:26‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No.‬‬
‫‪4/7‬‬
‫‪Playlist No. 3‬‬
‫‪Modify‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ▲▼‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻀﺎف ﻗﺒﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺬي‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ▲▼‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر اﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪Edit Scene‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ،Add‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫زر ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Add Scene‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No. 004‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No.‬‬
‫‪6/7‬‬
‫‪Playlist No. 3‬‬
‫‪06 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪05 00:00:11‬‬
‫‪04 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪Title List : 4/6‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Modify‬‬
‫‪03 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪02 00:00:07‬‬
‫‪01 00:00:26‬‬
‫‪06 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪05 00:00:11‬‬
‫‪04 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫‪Add Scene‬‬
‫• وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر اﻟﻰ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪Edit Scene‬‬
‫‪Playlist No. 3‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No. 004‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪00:00:00‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪DVD-Recorder‬‬
‫)‪DVD-RW(VR‬‬
‫‪Scene No.‬‬
‫‪5/7‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪Title List : 4/6‬‬
‫‪00:00:15‬‬
‫‪00:00:15‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪Modify‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪03 00:00:03‬‬
‫‪02 00:00:07‬‬
‫‪01 00:00:26‬‬
‫‪06 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪05 00:00:04‬‬
‫‪04 00:00:11‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MOVE‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫اﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷزرار ) ‪( ، ، ، ، ، ،‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٧٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:30:02 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 75‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
DVD-Recorder
PLAY LIST ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬PLAY LIST ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
02 Sky
Science
١
00:00:06
►
00:00:06
►
04 Natural
00:00:37
►
00:00:15
00:00:35
00:00:35
Start
End
Add
Cancel
OK
RETURN
1 Scene
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Add ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
OK
RETURN
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
.OK ‫زر‬
EXIT
.MENU ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Edit Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
4/8
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:20
05 00:00:03
06 00:00:11
Move
Add
٢
OK
Delete
RETURN
EXIT
‫• اﳉﺰء اﻟﺬي ﻳﺮﻳﺪ إﺿﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻀﺎف اﻟﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‬
.٤ ‫ﻓﻲ اﳋﻄﻮة‬
،(‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Play : ‫وﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
،(‫ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬Edit Scene ،(‫ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬Rename
.(‫ )ﺣﺬف‬Delete ،(‫ )ﻧﺴﺦ‬Copy
No. Title
01 Science
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
02 Sky
00:00:06
Play
00:00:06
Rename
00:00:37
03 Dolphin
04 Natural
Dolphin
7 Scene
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺬي‬
▼▲ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار‬
.OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮه‬
►
►
►
Edit Scene
Copy
APR/23/2006 06:43
٤
Delete
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/7
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Copy ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‬
٣
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
Play
Modify
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:07
03 00:00:04
04 00:00:03
05 00:00:11
06 00:00:04
Move
Add
OK
MOVE
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
No. Title
01 Science
02 Sky
03 Dolphin
04 Natural
Dolphin
7 Scene
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
00:00:06
Play
00:00:06
Rename
00:00:37
►
►
Edit Scene
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Scene No.
2/6
Delete
OK
RETURN
٥
►
Copy
APR/23/2006 06:43
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Delete ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
3/4
Dolphin
MOVE
.٣٧ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬٣ - ١ ‫ اتﺑﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات‬،‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪاد‬
3/4
Dolphin
MOVE
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
٨
Modify
MOVE
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮ ﻳﺪ‬
‫ أو‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
. ‫زر‬
EXIT
‫• ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬
.‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬،‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
Title List : 4/6
MOVE
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
03 Dolphin
٧
Scene No. 004
Start
End
3/4
No. Title
01 Science
Add Scene
DVD-RW(VR)
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Science
.‫ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
Edit Scene
Playlist No. 3
EXIT
Play
Modify
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
01 00:00:26
02 00:00:04
03 00:00:03
04 00:00:11
05 00:00:04
06 00:00:05
5/5
Dolphin
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Dolphin
7 Scene
Title
Science
Sky
Dolphin
Natural
Dolphin
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:37 ►
00:00:06 ►
Move
Add
MOVE
OK
RETURN
Delete
EXIT
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
٧٦- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 76
3/28/2006 12:30:09 PM
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Delete ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٣
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
5/5
Dolphin
No.
Title
01 Science
02 Sky
03 Dolphin
04 Natural
05 Dolphin
Dolphin
7 Scene
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﺎدة ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
OK
RETURN
EXIT
PLAY LIST ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
."‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ اﶈﻮ " ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﶈﻮ؟‬
‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬PLAY LIST ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
5/5
Dolphin
Yes
Dolphin
7 Scene
Science
1/5
No.
Title
01 Science
02 Sky
03 Dolphin
04 Natural
05 Dolphin
No
APR/23/2006 06:43
OK
RETURN
EXIT
١
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Do you want to delete?
MOVE
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
Delete
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
Play 00:00:06 ►
00:00:06 ►
Rename
00:00:37 ►
Edit Scene
Copy00:00:06 ►
‫ وﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬.‫ ﻣﺸﻬﺪا ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص واﺣﺪ‬٩٩٩ ‫■ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﺑﺪاع‬
.‫ ﻫﺬا ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬،‫اﳊﺎﻻت‬
‫ وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬.‫ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬MENU ‫■ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫ﺗﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
Science
1 Scene
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:37 ►
00:00:06 ►
APR/23/2006 06:43
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Yes ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
.OK ‫زر‬
‫وﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﶈﻮ‬
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
5/5
Deleting...
(Please wait)
Dolphin
7 Scene
APR/23/2006 06:43
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
٤
MOVE
OK
No.
Title
01 Science
02 Sky
03 Dolphin
04 Natural
.MENU ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام زر‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Edit Playlist ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﺎر اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ أو‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،‫ﻣﺤﻮه ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
. ‫زر‬
٢
،(‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Play : ‫وﺗﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
،(‫ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬Edit Scene ،(‫ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬Rename
.(‫ )ﺣﺬف‬Delete ،(‫ )ﻧﺴﺦ‬Copy
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:06 ►
00:00:37 ►
Edit Playlist
DVD-RW(VR)
Dolphin
5/5
No.
Title
01 Science
02 Sky
03 Dolphin
04 Natural
05 Dolphin
Natural
1 Scene
APR/23/2006 06:43
OK
RETURN
EXIT
Dolphin
7 Scene
MOVE
OK
Length Edit
00:00:17 ►
Play 00:00:06 ►
00:00:06 ►
Rename
00:00:37 ►
Edit Scene
Copy00:00:06 ►
Delete
APR/23/2006 06:43
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
EXIT
4/4
Natural
MOVE
RETURN
RETURN
EXIT
٧٧- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 77
3/28/2006 12:30:14 PM
.
▼▲ ‫ادﺧﻞ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أزرار‬
DVD-Recorder
٤
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
Rename
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
Save
Back Space
MOVE
Space
OK
Delete
Clear
RETURN
.‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺮص‬
EXIT
‫• ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺸﻲء ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
(.٦٦ ‫ )راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬.‫ﻓﻲ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
١٣ ‫• وﻋﺪد اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ اﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮ ﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬١٣ ‫ وﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬.‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺔ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‬INFO ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Save ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
▼▲ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار‬
.OK ‫اﺿﻐﻄﻌﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٥
DVD-Recorder
١
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Title List
►
Playlist
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
MOVE
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Programme
Setup
MOVE
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
OK
RETURN
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Manager ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٢
EXIT
‫ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎج اﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺬي ﰎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ‬
.‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
.‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‬،‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‬
DVD-Recorder
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
■
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
■
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Programme
Setup
►
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Name ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ‬
DVD-Recorder
٣
Rename
DVD-RW(VR)
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
Save
Back Space
MOVE
Space
OK
Delete
RETURN
Clear
EXIT
٧٨- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 78
3/28/2006 12:30:17 PM
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻗﺮص‬
.‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻗﺮص‬
.‫وﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ أﻧﻬﺎ ﲤﻨﻊ اﶈﻮ‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
Title List
١
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ أو اﶈﻮ‬
.‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
Title List
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Title List
►
Playlist
Playlist
Disc Manager
Disc Manager
Programme
Programme
Setup
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
DVD-Recorder
Title List
MOVE
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Manager ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
٢
Disc Manager
OK
►
RETURN
Disc Manager
Disc Name :
►
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Disc Finalise
►
Programme
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
OK
MOVE
: DVD-VR
RETURN
Setup
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Format ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
MOVE
٣
OK
►
: DVD-VR
RETURN
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Protection ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
Title List
Disc Name :
►
Disc Name :
►
Playlist
Disc Protection
Not Protected
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
Protected
DVD-VR
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Programme
Disc Finalise
►
Programme
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
: DVD-VR
Setup
OK
MOVE
MOVE
OK
RETURN
RETURN
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Protected ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
.OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Playlist
Disc Name :
►
Disc Protection : Not Protected
Format : format
DVD-VR
ChooseDisc
the recording
for DVD-RW
Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Programme
Delete
All Title Lists
DVD-VR
DVD-V
Setup
OK
RETURN
Disc Manager
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Protected
►
►
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Programme
Disc Finalise
►
►
Setup
Delete All Title Lists
►
►
٤
DVD-RW(VR)
: DVD-VR
►
MOVE
MOVE
EXIT
EXIT
DVD-RW
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ " اﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
".DVD-RW ‫ﻟﻘﺮص‬
DVD-Recorder
٣
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Setup
٢
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Setup
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Manager ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
DVD-RW(VR)
Programme
١
OK
RETURN
EXIT
EXIT
٧٩- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 79
3/28/2006 12:30:19 PM
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Manager ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
٢
Disc Manager
،‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‬
.OK ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
”‫”ﺳﻴﺘﻤﺤﺬﻓﻜﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ؟‬
٤
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
DVD-Recorder
►
DVD-RW(VR)
Disc Finalise
►
Title List
Delete All Title Lists
►
Playlist
Disc Manager Disc Format
Programme
Setup
►
MOVE
OK
: DVD-VR
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
Disc Name :
٣
OK
MOVE
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Yes ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
Title List
Disc Name :
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Setup
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
MOVE
OK
RETURN
►
►
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
.OK ‫زر‬
٥
‫ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬DVD-V ‫ و‬DVD-VR ‫وﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮص‬
.‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
EXIT
DVD-V
DVD-VR
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DISC
Disc Manager
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺎت اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Discwant
Format
: DVD-VR
Do you
to delete
all title lists?
Disc Manager
►
Programme
Disc Finalize
►
Setup
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
►
MOVE
►
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ " ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
."‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان؟‬
DVD-Recorder
►
EXIT
RETURN
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Programme
►
Disc Protection : Not Protected
All data will be deleted.
Format : DVD-VR
Disc Manager Disc
Do you want to continue?
Disc Finalize
Programme
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
Setup
EXIT
Delete All Title ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬،Lists
Disc Manager
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﻮ‬:‫• ﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد اﳌﺎدة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬
،‫ إذا اﺣﺘﻮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬.‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫ ﻻ‬،‫ وإذا أردت ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﺎدة ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬.‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
.‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﺎدة ﰎ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Yes ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻻﺋﺤﺎت اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
Title List
١
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
٤
Title List
►
Playlist
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
٨٠- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 80
3/28/2006 12:30:21 PM
‫إﲤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص‬
."‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إﲤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص؟‬
DVD-Recorder
‫ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬DVD-RW/DVD-R ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮص‬
‫ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮورة إﲤﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ أن ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬،‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
.‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ‬
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc
DVD-VR
youFormat
want to: finalise
disc?
Disc Manager Do
Programme
Setup
►
Disc Finalize
►
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
►
OK
MOVE
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
EXIT
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
‫ﺘﻢ إﲤﺎم‬¥‫ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺳ‬،Yes ‫إذا اﺧﺘﺮت‬
."‫ ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار؟‬.‫اﻟﻘﺮص‬
Title List
١
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Title List
►
Playlist
Disc Manager
DVD-Recorder
Programme
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Setup
Title List
Disc Name :
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc
will be: finalised.
Format
DVD-VR
Disc Manager Disc
Do you want to continue?
Programme Disc Finalize
Delete
Yes All Title Lists
No
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،Yes ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
►
►
►
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Manager ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
EXIT
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
.OK ‫زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺠﺮي إﲤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص‬
٤
DVD-Recorder
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Programme
Setup
‫ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﻮ اﳌﻮاد ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬،‫■ ﻋﻨﺪ إﲤﺎم ﻗﺮص‬
.‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ )وﺿﻊ‬DVD-RW/DVD-R ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ أﻗﺮاص‬،‫■ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻹﲤﺎم‬
.DVD-Video ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛـ‬
.‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‬،‫■ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫■ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﻗﺖ اﻹﲤﺎم ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
.‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
ّ
‫■ ﺳﺘﺘﻀﺮر اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﻃﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
.‫اﳌﺴﺠﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻹﲤﺎم‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
ّ
٢
►
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Finalise ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
٣
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR)
Title List
Disc Name :
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc Manager
Disc Format
►
Programme
Setup
►
: DVD-VR
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
MOVE
OK
RETURN
DVD-Recorder
EXIT
Disc Manager
DVD-R(V)
Title List
Disc Name :
►
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
Disc Manager Disc Protection : Not Protected
Programme
Setup
MOVE
►
Disc Finalise
►
Delete All Title Lists
►
OK
RETURN
EXIT
٨١- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 81
3/28/2006 12:30:23 PM
‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬،Yes ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري‬
.OK ‫ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
.‫وﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺠﺮي ﻋﺪم إﲤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ أو ﻋﺪم إﲤﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬DVD-RW ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﲤﺎم ﻗﺮص‬
.‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺪم إﲤﺎم‬
‫إﲤﺎم‬
DVD-RW(V)
DVD-Video(RW)
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
،‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ واﶈﻮ‬.
‫ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺸﻲء ﻣﻊ‬
DVD-Video
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
٤
(V/VR ‫ﻋﺪم إﲤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص)وﺿﻊ‬
■
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
.‫ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬MENU ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
Title List
١
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Title List
►
Playlist
.VR ‫ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬DVD-RW ‫ﳝﻜﻦ إﲤﺎم أو ﻋﺪم إﲤﺎم ﻗﺮص‬
■
Disc Manager
Programme
Setup
‫ﻋﺪم إﲤﺎم‬
‫إﲤﺎم‬
DVD-RW(VR)
DVD-RW(VR:F)
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
،‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
.‫ اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬،‫ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬،‫اﶈﻮ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
،‫ اﶈﻮ‬،‫اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
.‫ اﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬،‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Manager ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
DVD-Recorder
٢
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
►
Playlist
Disc Format : DVD-VR
►
Disc Manager
Disc Unfinalise
►
Programme
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺛﻢ‬،Disc Unfinalise ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زري ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
. ‫ أو زر‬OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺪم إﲤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص؟‬
DVD-Recorder
٣
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Format
: DVD-VRdisc?
you want
to unfinalise
Disc ManagerDoDisc
Programme
►
Disc Finalize
Yes
Setup
MOVE
OK
No
RETURN
EXIT
‫ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺳﻴﺠﺮي ﻋﺪم‬،Yes ‫إذا اﺧﺘﺮت‬
"‫ ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار؟‬.‫إﲤﺎم اﻟﻘﺮص‬
DVD-Recorder
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
Disc Manager
DVD-RW(VR:F)
Title List
Disc Name : Disc
►
Playlist
Disc Protection : Not Protected
►
Disc will be unfinalised.
Disc Manager Disc Format : DVD-VR
Do you want to continue?
Disc Finalize
Programme
Yes
No
Setup
MOVE
OK
RETURN
►
EXIT
٨٢- ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
R130 68end.indd 82
3/28/2006 12:30:24 PM
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ءذا ﻛﺎن ﺟﻬﺎزك ﻣﻌﻄﻼ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻔﺤﺺ اﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ أدﻧﺎه ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﱋ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺺ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮض اﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﳊﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﻰ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫ّ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ وﻳﻌﺮض اﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﳌﺪة ‪ ٠١‬ﺛﻮان‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎر اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺮج‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ﻗﻨﺎة ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻔﺎرﻏﺔ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪.DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ REC‬وﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺮ ّد‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ أﻗﺮاص‪DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬وإذا ﲤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺮى اﳋﻠﻞ وإﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪٣٨......................................................‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪٧٨......................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨٣-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:30:26 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 83‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ رﻗﻌﺘﻪ اﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪) .‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻲ ‪ ٥‬و‪(.٦٤‬‬
‫‪.‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ أو‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﺒﺎب اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﺪود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل ‪ :‬اﻟﺰواﻳﺎ(‬
‫)‪ (٣‬اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮ ّﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮان‪ ،‬ﻓﺼﻞ أو وﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺧﺎرج اﳌﺪى‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰواﻳﺎ‬
‫اﺨﻤﻟﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ و‪/‬أو ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ وﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪدﺗﺎن ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬وﺗﺘﻮ ّﻓﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻷودﻳﻮ وﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص دي ﻓﻲ دي وﺗﻌﺮض ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮ ّﻓﺮ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺾ وﺿﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﺿﻌﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻷﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي‪.‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻲ ‪ ١٣‬و‪(.٢٣‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨٤-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:30:26 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 84‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻘﺮص ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ واﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻌﺪوﻣﺔ أو ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫اﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻌﻴﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٣‬و ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮد ﺿﺮر أو أي ﺷﻲء ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٤‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﻌﺘﻢ اﻟﻰ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺄة‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻬﺘﺰ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ اﳋﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٣‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻻ ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ أو وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻰ ؟‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‬
‫أو اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ أو اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت ووﺿﻌﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٩١‬و ‪ ٩٢ ،٠٢‬و ‪(٠٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺮر اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫وﻧﻈﻒ اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫رﻗﻌﺘﻪ اﻟﻰ اﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻘﺮص اﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎدة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أم ﻻ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫اﻋﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ووﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻧﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﻧﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ أو اﻷﺳﺒﺎب‬
‫اﻷﺧﺮى اﻟﺸﺒﻴﻬﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎرات اﺨﻤﻟﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎرات ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت‪) .‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪(٩٢‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨٥-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:30:27 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 85‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫وﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫إﺷﺎرات ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز دي‬
‫ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬واﺗﺮك ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬واﻧﺰع‬
‫اﻟﻌﻮاﺋﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي اﳌﺴﺠﻞ وﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎذ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ زر اﺧﺘﻴﺎرزر ‪ TV‬أو ز ر ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫اﻗﺮأ ﺟﺪول اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺛﻢ اﺑﺤﺚ واﻗﺮأ اﳉﺰء ﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٢‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻞ وﺷﻐﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اوﻗﻒ ﺟﻬﺎز دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪٣‬‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﲢﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ ﻟﻺﺷﺮاف اﻷﺑﻮي‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫( ‪PROG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ )‬
‫آن واﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮان ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻗﺮص ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ .DVD‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮد ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻹﻋﺪادات إﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور‪.‬‬
‫وﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم إﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺮورة ﻣﻠﺤﺔ‪) .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫آن ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم إدﺧﺎل‬
‫ﻗﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ؟‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﺷﺎرة ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ أو أودﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮص‬
‫ّ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﻗﺮص‬
‫ّ‬
‫واﻷودﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨٦-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:30:27 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 86‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١‬واط‬
‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮزن‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎم‬
‫‪ ٢٫٦‬ﻛﻐﻢ‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬
‫‪ ٤٣٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮض( ‪ ٢٤٠ X‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ‪ ٤٩ X‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ارﺗﻔﺎع(‬
‫درﺟﺔ اﳊﺮادة ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷﺣﻮال اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪Vrms ٢ :‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ )‪IEEE 1394(4p‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‬
‫‪I ،D/K ،SECAM-B/G ،PAL‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﺻﻮت ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪٢X‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﺨﻤﻟﺮج‬
‫‪ ْ ٥‬م ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ْ ٣٥ +‬م ‪+‬‬
‫اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻮاء ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٧٥‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ ٧٥‬أوم‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ‪ Vp-p‬ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ‪١٫٠ :‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١١٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج ﺻﻮت رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺼﺮي‪/‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﻣﺤﻮر‬
‫ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮوج ﺻﻮرة ‪١X‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻔﻮق‪ Vp-p ٠ ،٢٨٦ : C ،Vp-p ١٫٠ : Y) ١X‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ ٧٥‬أوم(‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج ﻣﻜﻮن ‪ Vp-p ٠٫٧٠ : PR ،Vp-p ٠٫٧٠ : Pb ،Vp-p ١٫٠ :Y) ١X‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ ٧٥‬أوم(‬
‫‪MPEG-II‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪MPEG-II ،Kbpss٢٥٦/‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮدد اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪) XP‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪) SP ،(Mbps ٨‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪) LP ،(Mbps ٤‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪.(Mbps ٢‬‬
‫‪) EP‬ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ Mbps ١٫٢‬أو ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪( Mbps ٠٫٨‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٢٠ -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮدد ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ أﻗﺮاص دي ﻓﻲ دي‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮل اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ وﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫دي ﻓﻲ دي‬
‫ﻗﺮص اﻷودﻳﻮ)‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ٩٦/٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٤٤٫١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٤٤٫١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨٧-‬‬
‫‪3/28/2006 12:30:27 PM‬‬
‫‪R130 68end.indd 87‬‬
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer
care centre.
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻀﺮوع ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺣﻮل اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬
‫ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻼء اﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬،‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أي ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت أو اﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎرات ﺑﺸﺄن ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎت ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Country
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
RUSSIA
UKRAINE
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
Asia Pacific
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
Middle East & Africa
R130 68end.indd 88
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Customer Care Centre ☎
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421
800-726-7864(SAMSUNG)
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-7267-864
1-800-100-5303
02 201 2418
844 000 844
38 322 887
09 693 79 554
08 25 08 65 65 (0,15€/Min)
01805 - 121213 (€ 0,12/Min)
06 40 985 985
199 153 153
02 261 03 710
0900 20 200 88 (€ 0.10/Min)
231 627 22
0 801 801 881
80 8 200 128
0850 123 989
902 10 11 30
08 585 367 87
0870 242 0303
8-800-200-0400
8-800-502-0000
1300 362 603
800-810-5858, 010- 6475 1880
2862 6001
3030 8282
1600 1100 11
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)
800SAMSUNG (7267864)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/ur
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com.cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/mea
3/28/2006 12:30:28 PM
AK68-01004L-00
R130-COVER.indd 2
English
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
3/28/2006 12:31:35 PM
Download PDF